linux/arch/x86/entry/entry_64.S

1555 lines
43 KiB
ArmAsm
Raw Normal View History

License cleanup: add SPDX GPL-2.0 license identifier to files with no license Many source files in the tree are missing licensing information, which makes it harder for compliance tools to determine the correct license. By default all files without license information are under the default license of the kernel, which is GPL version 2. Update the files which contain no license information with the 'GPL-2.0' SPDX license identifier. The SPDX identifier is a legally binding shorthand, which can be used instead of the full boiler plate text. This patch is based on work done by Thomas Gleixner and Kate Stewart and Philippe Ombredanne. How this work was done: Patches were generated and checked against linux-4.14-rc6 for a subset of the use cases: - file had no licensing information it it. - file was a */uapi/* one with no licensing information in it, - file was a */uapi/* one with existing licensing information, Further patches will be generated in subsequent months to fix up cases where non-standard license headers were used, and references to license had to be inferred by heuristics based on keywords. The analysis to determine which SPDX License Identifier to be applied to a file was done in a spreadsheet of side by side results from of the output of two independent scanners (ScanCode & Windriver) producing SPDX tag:value files created by Philippe Ombredanne. Philippe prepared the base worksheet, and did an initial spot review of a few 1000 files. The 4.13 kernel was the starting point of the analysis with 60,537 files assessed. Kate Stewart did a file by file comparison of the scanner results in the spreadsheet to determine which SPDX license identifier(s) to be applied to the file. She confirmed any determination that was not immediately clear with lawyers working with the Linux Foundation. Criteria used to select files for SPDX license identifier tagging was: - Files considered eligible had to be source code files. - Make and config files were included as candidates if they contained >5 lines of source - File already had some variant of a license header in it (even if <5 lines). All documentation files were explicitly excluded. The following heuristics were used to determine which SPDX license identifiers to apply. - when both scanners couldn't find any license traces, file was considered to have no license information in it, and the top level COPYING file license applied. For non */uapi/* files that summary was: SPDX license identifier # files ---------------------------------------------------|------- GPL-2.0 11139 and resulted in the first patch in this series. If that file was a */uapi/* path one, it was "GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note" otherwise it was "GPL-2.0". Results of that was: SPDX license identifier # files ---------------------------------------------------|------- GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note 930 and resulted in the second patch in this series. - if a file had some form of licensing information in it, and was one of the */uapi/* ones, it was denoted with the Linux-syscall-note if any GPL family license was found in the file or had no licensing in it (per prior point). Results summary: SPDX license identifier # files ---------------------------------------------------|------ GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note 270 GPL-2.0+ WITH Linux-syscall-note 169 ((GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note) OR BSD-2-Clause) 21 ((GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note) OR BSD-3-Clause) 17 LGPL-2.1+ WITH Linux-syscall-note 15 GPL-1.0+ WITH Linux-syscall-note 14 ((GPL-2.0+ WITH Linux-syscall-note) OR BSD-3-Clause) 5 LGPL-2.0+ WITH Linux-syscall-note 4 LGPL-2.1 WITH Linux-syscall-note 3 ((GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note) OR MIT) 3 ((GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note) AND MIT) 1 and that resulted in the third patch in this series. - when the two scanners agreed on the detected license(s), that became the concluded license(s). - when there was disagreement between the two scanners (one detected a license but the other didn't, or they both detected different licenses) a manual inspection of the file occurred. - In most cases a manual inspection of the information in the file resulted in a clear resolution of the license that should apply (and which scanner probably needed to revisit its heuristics). - When it was not immediately clear, the license identifier was confirmed with lawyers working with the Linux Foundation. - If there was any question as to the appropriate license identifier, the file was flagged for further research and to be revisited later in time. In total, over 70 hours of logged manual review was done on the spreadsheet to determine the SPDX license identifiers to apply to the source files by Kate, Philippe, Thomas and, in some cases, confirmation by lawyers working with the Linux Foundation. Kate also obtained a third independent scan of the 4.13 code base from FOSSology, and compared selected files where the other two scanners disagreed against that SPDX file, to see if there was new insights. The Windriver scanner is based on an older version of FOSSology in part, so they are related. Thomas did random spot checks in about 500 files from the spreadsheets for the uapi headers and agreed with SPDX license identifier in the files he inspected. For the non-uapi files Thomas did random spot checks in about 15000 files. In initial set of patches against 4.14-rc6, 3 files were found to have copy/paste license identifier errors, and have been fixed to reflect the correct identifier. Additionally Philippe spent 10 hours this week doing a detailed manual inspection and review of the 12,461 patched files from the initial patch version early this week with: - a full scancode scan run, collecting the matched texts, detected license ids and scores - reviewing anything where there was a license detected (about 500+ files) to ensure that the applied SPDX license was correct - reviewing anything where there was no detection but the patch license was not GPL-2.0 WITH Linux-syscall-note to ensure that the applied SPDX license was correct This produced a worksheet with 20 files needing minor correction. This worksheet was then exported into 3 different .csv files for the different types of files to be modified. These .csv files were then reviewed by Greg. Thomas wrote a script to parse the csv files and add the proper SPDX tag to the file, in the format that the file expected. This script was further refined by Greg based on the output to detect more types of files automatically and to distinguish between header and source .c files (which need different comment types.) Finally Greg ran the script using the .csv files to generate the patches. Reviewed-by: Kate Stewart <kstewart@linuxfoundation.org> Reviewed-by: Philippe Ombredanne <pombredanne@nexb.com> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
2017-11-01 15:07:57 +01:00
/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 */
/*
* linux/arch/x86_64/entry.S
*
* Copyright (C) 1991, 1992 Linus Torvalds
* Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002 Andi Kleen SuSE Labs
* Copyright (C) 2000 Pavel Machek <pavel@suse.cz>
*
* entry.S contains the system-call and fault low-level handling routines.
*
* Some of this is documented in Documentation/arch/x86/entry_64.rst
*
* A note on terminology:
* - iret frame: Architecture defined interrupt frame from SS to RIP
* at the top of the kernel process stack.
*
* Some macro usage:
x86/asm: Change all ENTRY+ENDPROC to SYM_FUNC_* These are all functions which are invoked from elsewhere, so annotate them as global using the new SYM_FUNC_START and their ENDPROC's by SYM_FUNC_END. Make sure ENTRY/ENDPROC is not defined on X86_64, given these were the last users. Signed-off-by: Jiri Slaby <jslaby@suse.cz> Signed-off-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com> [hibernate] Reviewed-by: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> [xen bits] Acked-by: Herbert Xu <herbert@gondor.apana.org.au> [crypto] Cc: Allison Randal <allison@lohutok.net> Cc: Andrey Ryabinin <aryabinin@virtuozzo.com> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Andy Shevchenko <andy@infradead.org> Cc: Ard Biesheuvel <ard.biesheuvel@linaro.org> Cc: Armijn Hemel <armijn@tjaldur.nl> Cc: Cao jin <caoj.fnst@cn.fujitsu.com> Cc: Darren Hart <dvhart@infradead.org> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: "David S. Miller" <davem@davemloft.net> Cc: Enrico Weigelt <info@metux.net> Cc: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: Herbert Xu <herbert@gondor.apana.org.au> Cc: "H. Peter Anvin" <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Ingo Molnar <mingo@redhat.com> Cc: Jim Mattson <jmattson@google.com> Cc: Joerg Roedel <joro@8bytes.org> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Kate Stewart <kstewart@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: "Kirill A. Shutemov" <kirill.shutemov@linux.intel.com> Cc: kvm ML <kvm@vger.kernel.org> Cc: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com> Cc: linux-arch@vger.kernel.org Cc: linux-crypto@vger.kernel.org Cc: linux-efi <linux-efi@vger.kernel.org> Cc: linux-efi@vger.kernel.org Cc: linux-pm@vger.kernel.org Cc: Mark Rutland <mark.rutland@arm.com> Cc: Matt Fleming <matt@codeblueprint.co.uk> Cc: Paolo Bonzini <pbonzini@redhat.com> Cc: Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: platform-driver-x86@vger.kernel.org Cc: "Radim Krčmář" <rkrcmar@redhat.com> Cc: Sean Christopherson <sean.j.christopherson@intel.com> Cc: Stefano Stabellini <sstabellini@kernel.org> Cc: "Steven Rostedt (VMware)" <rostedt@goodmis.org> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Vitaly Kuznetsov <vkuznets@redhat.com> Cc: Wanpeng Li <wanpengli@tencent.com> Cc: Wei Huang <wei@redhat.com> Cc: x86-ml <x86@kernel.org> Cc: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org Cc: Xiaoyao Li <xiaoyao.li@linux.intel.com> Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20191011115108.12392-25-jslaby@suse.cz
2019-10-11 13:51:04 +02:00
* - SYM_FUNC_START/END:Define functions in the symbol table.
* - idtentry: Define exception entry points.
*/
#include <linux/export.h>
#include <linux/linkage.h>
#include <asm/segment.h>
#include <asm/cache.h>
#include <asm/errno.h>
#include <asm/asm-offsets.h>
#include <asm/msr.h>
#include <asm/unistd.h>
#include <asm/thread_info.h>
#include <asm/hw_irq.h>
#include <asm/page_types.h>
#include <asm/irqflags.h>
#include <asm/paravirt.h>
#include <asm/percpu.h>
#include <asm/asm.h>
#include <asm/smap.h>
x86-64, espfix: Don't leak bits 31:16 of %esp returning to 16-bit stack The IRET instruction, when returning to a 16-bit segment, only restores the bottom 16 bits of the user space stack pointer. This causes some 16-bit software to break, but it also leaks kernel state to user space. We have a software workaround for that ("espfix") for the 32-bit kernel, but it relies on a nonzero stack segment base which is not available in 64-bit mode. In checkin: b3b42ac2cbae x86-64, modify_ldt: Ban 16-bit segments on 64-bit kernels we "solved" this by forbidding 16-bit segments on 64-bit kernels, with the logic that 16-bit support is crippled on 64-bit kernels anyway (no V86 support), but it turns out that people are doing stuff like running old Win16 binaries under Wine and expect it to work. This works around this by creating percpu "ministacks", each of which is mapped 2^16 times 64K apart. When we detect that the return SS is on the LDT, we copy the IRET frame to the ministack and use the relevant alias to return to userspace. The ministacks are mapped readonly, so if IRET faults we promote #GP to #DF which is an IST vector and thus has its own stack; we then do the fixup in the #DF handler. (Making #GP an IST exception would make the msr_safe functions unsafe in NMI/MC context, and quite possibly have other effects.) Special thanks to: - Andy Lutomirski, for the suggestion of using very small stack slots and copy (as opposed to map) the IRET frame there, and for the suggestion to mark them readonly and let the fault promote to #DF. - Konrad Wilk for paravirt fixup and testing. - Borislav Petkov for testing help and useful comments. Reported-by: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/1398816946-3351-1-git-send-email-hpa@linux.intel.com Cc: Konrad Rzeszutek Wilk <konrad.wilk@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Andrew Lutomriski <amluto@gmail.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org> Cc: Arjan van de Ven <arjan.van.de.ven@intel.com> Cc: comex <comexk@gmail.com> Cc: Alexander van Heukelum <heukelum@fastmail.fm> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # consider after upstream merge
2014-04-29 16:46:09 -07:00
#include <asm/pgtable_types.h>
#include <asm/frame.h>
#include <asm/trapnr.h>
x86/retpoline/entry: Convert entry assembler indirect jumps Convert indirect jumps in core 32/64bit entry assembler code to use non-speculative sequences when CONFIG_RETPOLINE is enabled. Don't use CALL_NOSPEC in entry_SYSCALL_64_fastpath because the return address after the 'call' instruction must be *precisely* at the .Lentry_SYSCALL_64_after_fastpath label for stub_ptregs_64 to work, and the use of alternatives will mess that up unless we play horrid games to prepend with NOPs and make the variants the same length. It's not worth it; in the case where we ALTERNATIVE out the retpoline, the first instruction at __x86.indirect_thunk.rax is going to be a bare jmp *%rax anyway. Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <dwmw@amazon.co.uk> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Acked-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org> Acked-by: Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com> Cc: gnomes@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Andi Kleen <ak@linux.intel.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: thomas.lendacky@amd.com Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Jiri Kosina <jikos@kernel.org> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Kees Cook <keescook@google.com> Cc: Tim Chen <tim.c.chen@linux.intel.com> Cc: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/1515707194-20531-7-git-send-email-dwmw@amazon.co.uk
2018-01-11 21:46:28 +00:00
#include <asm/nospec-branch.h>
#include <asm/fsgsbase.h>
Audit: push audit success and retcode into arch ptrace.h The audit system previously expected arches calling to audit_syscall_exit to supply as arguments if the syscall was a success and what the return code was. Audit also provides a helper AUDITSC_RESULT which was supposed to simplify things by converting from negative retcodes to an audit internal magic value stating success or failure. This helper was wrong and could indicate that a valid pointer returned to userspace was a failed syscall. The fix is to fix the layering foolishness. We now pass audit_syscall_exit a struct pt_reg and it in turns calls back into arch code to collect the return value and to determine if the syscall was a success or failure. We also define a generic is_syscall_success() macro which determines success/failure based on if the value is < -MAX_ERRNO. This works for arches like x86 which do not use a separate mechanism to indicate syscall failure. We make both the is_syscall_success() and regs_return_value() static inlines instead of macros. The reason is because the audit function must take a void* for the regs. (uml calls theirs struct uml_pt_regs instead of just struct pt_regs so audit_syscall_exit can't take a struct pt_regs). Since the audit function takes a void* we need to use static inlines to cast it back to the arch correct structure to dereference it. The other major change is that on some arches, like ia64, MIPS and ppc, we change regs_return_value() to give us the negative value on syscall failure. THE only other user of this macro, kretprobe_example.c, won't notice and it makes the value signed consistently for the audit functions across all archs. In arch/sh/kernel/ptrace_64.c I see that we were using regs[9] in the old audit code as the return value. But the ptrace_64.h code defined the macro regs_return_value() as regs[3]. I have no idea which one is correct, but this patch now uses the regs_return_value() function, so it now uses regs[3]. For powerpc we previously used regs->result but now use the regs_return_value() function which uses regs->gprs[3]. regs->gprs[3] is always positive so the regs_return_value(), much like ia64 makes it negative before calling the audit code when appropriate. Signed-off-by: Eric Paris <eparis@redhat.com> Acked-by: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> [for x86 portion] Acked-by: Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com> [for ia64] Acked-by: Richard Weinberger <richard@nod.at> [for uml] Acked-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net> [for sparc] Acked-by: Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org> [for mips] Acked-by: Benjamin Herrenschmidt <benh@kernel.crashing.org> [for ppc]
2012-01-03 14:23:06 -05:00
#include <linux/err.h>
x86/mm: Use/Fix PCID to optimize user/kernel switches We can use PCID to retain the TLBs across CR3 switches; including those now part of the user/kernel switch. This increases performance of kernel entry/exit at the cost of more expensive/complicated TLB flushing. Now that we have two address spaces, one for kernel and one for user space, we need two PCIDs per mm. We use the top PCID bit to indicate a user PCID (just like we use the PFN LSB for the PGD). Since we do TLB invalidation from kernel space, the existing code will only invalidate the kernel PCID, we augment that by marking the corresponding user PCID invalid, and upon switching back to userspace, use a flushing CR3 write for the switch. In order to access the user_pcid_flush_mask we use PER_CPU storage, which means the previously established SWAPGS vs CR3 ordering is now mandatory and required. Having to do this memory access does require additional registers, most sites have a functioning stack and we can spill one (RAX), sites without functional stack need to otherwise provide the second scratch register. Note: PCID is generally available on Intel Sandybridge and later CPUs. Note: Up until this point TLB flushing was broken in this series. Based-on-code-from: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:59 +01:00
#include "calling.h"
.code64
.section .entry.text, "ax"
/*
* 64-bit SYSCALL instruction entry. Up to 6 arguments in registers.
*
* This is the only entry point used for 64-bit system calls. The
* hardware interface is reasonably well designed and the register to
* argument mapping Linux uses fits well with the registers that are
* available when SYSCALL is used.
*
* SYSCALL instructions can be found inlined in libc implementations as
* well as some other programs and libraries. There are also a handful
* of SYSCALL instructions in the vDSO used, for example, as a
* clock_gettimeofday fallback.
*
* 64-bit SYSCALL saves rip to rcx, clears rflags.RF, then saves rflags to r11,
* then loads new ss, cs, and rip from previously programmed MSRs.
* rflags gets masked by a value from another MSR (so CLD and CLAC
* are not needed). SYSCALL does not save anything on the stack
* and does not change rsp.
*
* Registers on entry:
* rax system call number
* rcx return address
* r11 saved rflags (note: r11 is callee-clobbered register in C ABI)
* rdi arg0
* rsi arg1
* rdx arg2
* r10 arg3 (needs to be moved to rcx to conform to C ABI)
* r8 arg4
* r9 arg5
* (note: r12-r15, rbp, rbx are callee-preserved in C ABI)
*
* Only called from user space.
*
* When user can change pt_regs->foo always force IRET. That is because
* it deals with uncanonical addresses better. SYSRET has trouble
* with them due to bugs in both AMD and Intel CPUs.
*/
SYM_CODE_START(entry_SYSCALL_64)
UNWIND_HINT_ENTRY
ENDBR
swapgs
x86/pti/64: Remove the SYSCALL64 entry trampoline The SYSCALL64 trampoline has a couple of nice properties: - The usual sequence of SWAPGS followed by two GS-relative accesses to set up RSP is somewhat slow because the GS-relative accesses need to wait for SWAPGS to finish. The trampoline approach allows RIP-relative accesses to set up RSP, which avoids the stall. - The trampoline avoids any percpu access before CR3 is set up, which means that no percpu memory needs to be mapped in the user page tables. This prevents using Meltdown to read any percpu memory outside the cpu_entry_area and prevents using timing leaks to directly locate the percpu areas. The downsides of using a trampoline may outweigh the upsides, however. It adds an extra non-contiguous I$ cache line to system calls, and it forces an indirect jump to transfer control back to the normal kernel text after CR3 is set up. The latter is because x86 lacks a 64-bit direct jump instruction that could jump from the trampoline to the entry text. With retpolines enabled, the indirect jump is extremely slow. Change the code to map the percpu TSS into the user page tables to allow the non-trampoline SYSCALL64 path to work under PTI. This does not add a new direct information leak, since the TSS is readable by Meltdown from the cpu_entry_area alias regardless. It does allow a timing attack to locate the percpu area, but KASLR is more or less a lost cause against local attack on CPUs vulnerable to Meltdown regardless. As far as I'm concerned, on current hardware, KASLR is only useful to mitigate remote attacks that try to attack the kernel without first gaining RCE against a vulnerable user process. On Skylake, with CONFIG_RETPOLINE=y and KPTI on, this reduces syscall overhead from ~237ns to ~228ns. There is a possible alternative approach: Move the trampoline within 2G of the entry text and make a separate copy for each CPU. This would allow a direct jump to rejoin the normal entry path. There are pro's and con's for this approach: + It avoids a pipeline stall - It executes from an extra page and read from another extra page during the syscall. The latter is because it needs to use a relative addressing mode to find sp1 -- it's the same *cacheline*, but accessed using an alias, so it's an extra TLB entry. - Slightly more memory. This would be one page per CPU for a simple implementation and 64-ish bytes per CPU or one page per node for a more complex implementation. - More code complexity. The current approach is chosen for simplicity and because the alternative does not provide a significant benefit, which makes it worth. [ tglx: Added the alternative discussion to the changelog ] Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: Adrian Hunter <adrian.hunter@intel.com> Cc: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> Cc: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo <acme@kernel.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Joerg Roedel <joro@8bytes.org> Cc: Jiri Olsa <jolsa@redhat.com> Cc: Andi Kleen <ak@linux.intel.com> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/8c7c6e483612c3e4e10ca89495dc160b1aa66878.1536015544.git.luto@kernel.org
2018-09-03 15:59:44 -07:00
/* tss.sp2 is scratch space. */
movq %rsp, PER_CPU_VAR(cpu_tss_rw + TSS_sp2)
x86/pti/64: Remove the SYSCALL64 entry trampoline The SYSCALL64 trampoline has a couple of nice properties: - The usual sequence of SWAPGS followed by two GS-relative accesses to set up RSP is somewhat slow because the GS-relative accesses need to wait for SWAPGS to finish. The trampoline approach allows RIP-relative accesses to set up RSP, which avoids the stall. - The trampoline avoids any percpu access before CR3 is set up, which means that no percpu memory needs to be mapped in the user page tables. This prevents using Meltdown to read any percpu memory outside the cpu_entry_area and prevents using timing leaks to directly locate the percpu areas. The downsides of using a trampoline may outweigh the upsides, however. It adds an extra non-contiguous I$ cache line to system calls, and it forces an indirect jump to transfer control back to the normal kernel text after CR3 is set up. The latter is because x86 lacks a 64-bit direct jump instruction that could jump from the trampoline to the entry text. With retpolines enabled, the indirect jump is extremely slow. Change the code to map the percpu TSS into the user page tables to allow the non-trampoline SYSCALL64 path to work under PTI. This does not add a new direct information leak, since the TSS is readable by Meltdown from the cpu_entry_area alias regardless. It does allow a timing attack to locate the percpu area, but KASLR is more or less a lost cause against local attack on CPUs vulnerable to Meltdown regardless. As far as I'm concerned, on current hardware, KASLR is only useful to mitigate remote attacks that try to attack the kernel without first gaining RCE against a vulnerable user process. On Skylake, with CONFIG_RETPOLINE=y and KPTI on, this reduces syscall overhead from ~237ns to ~228ns. There is a possible alternative approach: Move the trampoline within 2G of the entry text and make a separate copy for each CPU. This would allow a direct jump to rejoin the normal entry path. There are pro's and con's for this approach: + It avoids a pipeline stall - It executes from an extra page and read from another extra page during the syscall. The latter is because it needs to use a relative addressing mode to find sp1 -- it's the same *cacheline*, but accessed using an alias, so it's an extra TLB entry. - Slightly more memory. This would be one page per CPU for a simple implementation and 64-ish bytes per CPU or one page per node for a more complex implementation. - More code complexity. The current approach is chosen for simplicity and because the alternative does not provide a significant benefit, which makes it worth. [ tglx: Added the alternative discussion to the changelog ] Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: Adrian Hunter <adrian.hunter@intel.com> Cc: Alexander Shishkin <alexander.shishkin@linux.intel.com> Cc: Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo <acme@kernel.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Joerg Roedel <joro@8bytes.org> Cc: Jiri Olsa <jolsa@redhat.com> Cc: Andi Kleen <ak@linux.intel.com> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/8c7c6e483612c3e4e10ca89495dc160b1aa66878.1536015544.git.luto@kernel.org
2018-09-03 15:59:44 -07:00
SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3 scratch_reg=%rsp
movq PER_CPU_VAR(pcpu_hot + X86_top_of_stack), %rsp
x86/asm/entry/64: Use PUSH instructions to build pt_regs on stack With this change, on SYSCALL64 code path we are now populating pt_regs->cs, pt_regs->ss and pt_regs->rcx unconditionally and therefore don't need to do that in FIXUP_TOP_OF_STACK. We lose a number of large instructions there: text data bss dec hex filename 13298 0 0 13298 33f2 entry_64_before.o 12978 0 0 12978 32b2 entry_64.o What's more important, we convert two "MOVQ $imm,off(%rsp)" to "PUSH $imm" (the ones which fill pt_regs->cs,ss). Before this patch, placing them on fast path was slowing it down by two cycles: this form of MOV is very large, 12 bytes, and this probably reduces decode bandwidth to one instruction per cycle when CPU sees them. Therefore they were living in FIXUP_TOP_OF_STACK instead (away from fast path). "PUSH $imm" is a small 2-byte instruction. Moving it to fast path does not slow it down in my measurements. Signed-off-by: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Acked-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Acked-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Alexei Starovoitov <ast@plumgrid.com> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Kees Cook <keescook@chromium.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Oleg Nesterov <oleg@redhat.com> Cc: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org> Cc: Will Drewry <wad@chromium.org> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/1426785469-15125-3-git-send-email-dvlasenk@redhat.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2015-03-19 18:17:47 +01:00
SYM_INNER_LABEL(entry_SYSCALL_64_safe_stack, SYM_L_GLOBAL)
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR
x86/asm/entry/64: Use PUSH instructions to build pt_regs on stack With this change, on SYSCALL64 code path we are now populating pt_regs->cs, pt_regs->ss and pt_regs->rcx unconditionally and therefore don't need to do that in FIXUP_TOP_OF_STACK. We lose a number of large instructions there: text data bss dec hex filename 13298 0 0 13298 33f2 entry_64_before.o 12978 0 0 12978 32b2 entry_64.o What's more important, we convert two "MOVQ $imm,off(%rsp)" to "PUSH $imm" (the ones which fill pt_regs->cs,ss). Before this patch, placing them on fast path was slowing it down by two cycles: this form of MOV is very large, 12 bytes, and this probably reduces decode bandwidth to one instruction per cycle when CPU sees them. Therefore they were living in FIXUP_TOP_OF_STACK instead (away from fast path). "PUSH $imm" is a small 2-byte instruction. Moving it to fast path does not slow it down in my measurements. Signed-off-by: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Acked-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Acked-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Alexei Starovoitov <ast@plumgrid.com> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Kees Cook <keescook@chromium.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Oleg Nesterov <oleg@redhat.com> Cc: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org> Cc: Will Drewry <wad@chromium.org> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/1426785469-15125-3-git-send-email-dvlasenk@redhat.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2015-03-19 18:17:47 +01:00
/* Construct struct pt_regs on stack */
pushq $__USER_DS /* pt_regs->ss */
pushq PER_CPU_VAR(cpu_tss_rw + TSS_sp2) /* pt_regs->sp */
pushq %r11 /* pt_regs->flags */
pushq $__USER_CS /* pt_regs->cs */
pushq %rcx /* pt_regs->ip */
SYM_INNER_LABEL(entry_SYSCALL_64_after_hwframe, SYM_L_GLOBAL)
pushq %rax /* pt_regs->orig_ax */
PUSH_AND_CLEAR_REGS rax=$-ENOSYS
/* IRQs are off. */
movq %rsp, %rdi
x86/entry/64: Sign-extend system calls on entry to int Right now, *some* code will treat e.g. 0x0000000100000001 as a system call and some will not. Some of the code, notably in ptrace, will treat 0x000000018000000 as a system call and some will not. Finally, right now, e.g. 335 for x86-64 will force the exit code to be set to -ENOSYS even if poked by ptrace, but 548 will not, because there is an observable difference between an out of range system call and a system call number that falls outside the range of the table. This is visible to the user: for example, the syscall_numbering_64 test fails if run under strace, because as strace uses ptrace, it ends up clobbering the upper half of the 64-bit system call number. The architecture independent code all assumes that a system call is "int" that the value -1 specifically and not just any negative value is used for a non-system call. This is the case on x86 as well when arch-independent code is involved. The arch-independent API is defined/documented (but not *implemented*!) in <asm-generic/syscall.h>. This is an ABI change, but is in fact a revert to the original x86-64 ABI. The original assembly entry code would zero-extend the system call number; Use sign extend to be explicit that this is treated as a signed number (although in practice it makes no difference, of course) and to avoid people getting the idea of "optimizing" it, as has happened on at least two(!) separate occasions. Do not store the extended value into regs->orig_ax, however: on x86-64, the ABI is that the callee is responsible for extending parameters, so only examining the lower 32 bits is fully consistent with any "int" argument to any system call, e.g. regs->di for write(2). The full value of %rax on entry to the kernel is thus still available. [ tglx: Add a comment to the ASM code ] Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin (Intel) <hpa@zytor.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/20210518191303.4135296-5-hpa@zytor.com
2021-05-18 12:13:01 -07:00
/* Sign extend the lower 32bit as syscall numbers are treated as int */
movslq %eax, %rsi
/* clobbers %rax, make sure it is after saving the syscall nr */
IBRS_ENTER
UNTRAIN_RET
x86/bhi: Add support for clearing branch history at syscall entry Branch History Injection (BHI) attacks may allow a malicious application to influence indirect branch prediction in kernel by poisoning the branch history. eIBRS isolates indirect branch targets in ring0. The BHB can still influence the choice of indirect branch predictor entry, and although branch predictor entries are isolated between modes when eIBRS is enabled, the BHB itself is not isolated between modes. Alder Lake and new processors supports a hardware control BHI_DIS_S to mitigate BHI. For older processors Intel has released a software sequence to clear the branch history on parts that don't support BHI_DIS_S. Add support to execute the software sequence at syscall entry and VMexit to overwrite the branch history. For now, branch history is not cleared at interrupt entry, as malicious applications are not believed to have sufficient control over the registers, since previous register state is cleared at interrupt entry. Researchers continue to poke at this area and it may become necessary to clear at interrupt entry as well in the future. This mitigation is only defined here. It is enabled later. Signed-off-by: Pawan Gupta <pawan.kumar.gupta@linux.intel.com> Co-developed-by: Daniel Sneddon <daniel.sneddon@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Daniel Sneddon <daniel.sneddon@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Alexandre Chartre <alexandre.chartre@oracle.com> Reviewed-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@kernel.org>
2024-03-11 08:56:58 -07:00
CLEAR_BRANCH_HISTORY
call do_syscall_64 /* returns with IRQs disabled */
/*
* Try to use SYSRET instead of IRET if we're returning to
* a completely clean 64-bit userspace context. If we're not,
* go to the slow exit path.
* In the Xen PV case we must use iret anyway.
*/
ALTERNATIVE "testb %al, %al; jz swapgs_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode", \
"jmp swapgs_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode", X86_FEATURE_XENPV
/*
* We win! This label is here just for ease of understanding
* perf profiles. Nothing jumps here.
*/
syscall_return_via_sysret:
IBRS_EXIT
POP_REGS pop_rdi=0
x86/entry/64: Return to userspace from the trampoline stack By itself, this is useless. It gives us the ability to run some final code before exit that cannnot run on the kernel stack. This could include a CR3 switch a la PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION or some kernel stack erasing, for example. (Or even weird things like *changing* which kernel stack gets used as an ASLR-strengthening mechanism.) The SYSRET32 path is not covered yet. It could be in the future or we could just ignore it and force the slow path if needed. Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.306546484@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:24 +01:00
/*
* Now all regs are restored except RSP and RDI.
* Save old stack pointer and switch to trampoline stack.
*/
movq %rsp, %rdi
x86/entry/64: Make cpu_entry_area.tss read-only The TSS is a fairly juicy target for exploits, and, now that the TSS is in the cpu_entry_area, it's no longer protected by kASLR. Make it read-only on x86_64. On x86_32, it can't be RO because it's written by the CPU during task switches, and we use a task gate for double faults. I'd also be nervous about errata if we tried to make it RO even on configurations without double fault handling. [ tglx: AMD confirmed that there is no problem on 64-bit with TSS RO. So it's probably safe to assume that it's a non issue, though Intel might have been creative in that area. Still waiting for confirmation. ] Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Kees Cook <keescook@chromium.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.733700132@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:29 +01:00
movq PER_CPU_VAR(cpu_tss_rw + TSS_sp0), %rsp
UNWIND_HINT_END_OF_STACK
x86/entry/64: Return to userspace from the trampoline stack By itself, this is useless. It gives us the ability to run some final code before exit that cannnot run on the kernel stack. This could include a CR3 switch a la PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION or some kernel stack erasing, for example. (Or even weird things like *changing* which kernel stack gets used as an ASLR-strengthening mechanism.) The SYSRET32 path is not covered yet. It could be in the future or we could just ignore it and force the slow path if needed. Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.306546484@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:24 +01:00
pushq RSP-RDI(%rdi) /* RSP */
pushq (%rdi) /* RDI */
/*
* We are on the trampoline stack. All regs except RDI are live.
* We can do future final exit work right here.
*/
x86/entry: Add STACKLEAK erasing the kernel stack at the end of syscalls The STACKLEAK feature (initially developed by PaX Team) has the following benefits: 1. Reduces the information that can be revealed through kernel stack leak bugs. The idea of erasing the thread stack at the end of syscalls is similar to CONFIG_PAGE_POISONING and memzero_explicit() in kernel crypto, which all comply with FDP_RIP.2 (Full Residual Information Protection) of the Common Criteria standard. 2. Blocks some uninitialized stack variable attacks (e.g. CVE-2017-17712, CVE-2010-2963). That kind of bugs should be killed by improving C compilers in future, which might take a long time. This commit introduces the code filling the used part of the kernel stack with a poison value before returning to userspace. Full STACKLEAK feature also contains the gcc plugin which comes in a separate commit. The STACKLEAK feature is ported from grsecurity/PaX. More information at: https://grsecurity.net/ https://pax.grsecurity.net/ This code is modified from Brad Spengler/PaX Team's code in the last public patch of grsecurity/PaX based on our understanding of the code. Changes or omissions from the original code are ours and don't reflect the original grsecurity/PaX code. Performance impact: Hardware: Intel Core i7-4770, 16 GB RAM Test #1: building the Linux kernel on a single core 0.91% slowdown Test #2: hackbench -s 4096 -l 2000 -g 15 -f 25 -P 4.2% slowdown So the STACKLEAK description in Kconfig includes: "The tradeoff is the performance impact: on a single CPU system kernel compilation sees a 1% slowdown, other systems and workloads may vary and you are advised to test this feature on your expected workload before deploying it". Signed-off-by: Alexander Popov <alex.popov@linux.com> Acked-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Acked-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Kees Cook <keescook@chromium.org>
2018-08-17 01:16:58 +03:00
STACKLEAK_ERASE_NOCLOBBER
x86/mm: Use/Fix PCID to optimize user/kernel switches We can use PCID to retain the TLBs across CR3 switches; including those now part of the user/kernel switch. This increases performance of kernel entry/exit at the cost of more expensive/complicated TLB flushing. Now that we have two address spaces, one for kernel and one for user space, we need two PCIDs per mm. We use the top PCID bit to indicate a user PCID (just like we use the PFN LSB for the PGD). Since we do TLB invalidation from kernel space, the existing code will only invalidate the kernel PCID, we augment that by marking the corresponding user PCID invalid, and upon switching back to userspace, use a flushing CR3 write for the switch. In order to access the user_pcid_flush_mask we use PER_CPU storage, which means the previously established SWAPGS vs CR3 ordering is now mandatory and required. Having to do this memory access does require additional registers, most sites have a functioning stack and we can spill one (RAX), sites without functional stack need to otherwise provide the second scratch register. Note: PCID is generally available on Intel Sandybridge and later CPUs. Note: Up until this point TLB flushing was broken in this series. Based-on-code-from: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:59 +01:00
SWITCH_TO_USER_CR3_STACK scratch_reg=%rdi
x86/entry/64: Return to userspace from the trampoline stack By itself, this is useless. It gives us the ability to run some final code before exit that cannnot run on the kernel stack. This could include a CR3 switch a la PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION or some kernel stack erasing, for example. (Or even weird things like *changing* which kernel stack gets used as an ASLR-strengthening mechanism.) The SYSRET32 path is not covered yet. It could be in the future or we could just ignore it and force the slow path if needed. Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.306546484@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:24 +01:00
popq %rdi
x86/entry/64: Return to userspace from the trampoline stack By itself, this is useless. It gives us the ability to run some final code before exit that cannnot run on the kernel stack. This could include a CR3 switch a la PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION or some kernel stack erasing, for example. (Or even weird things like *changing* which kernel stack gets used as an ASLR-strengthening mechanism.) The SYSRET32 path is not covered yet. It could be in the future or we could just ignore it and force the slow path if needed. Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.306546484@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:24 +01:00
popq %rsp
SYM_INNER_LABEL(entry_SYSRETQ_unsafe_stack, SYM_L_GLOBAL)
2022-05-20 10:26:04 +02:00
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR
swapgs
x86/entry_64: Add VERW just before userspace transition Mitigation for MDS is to use VERW instruction to clear any secrets in CPU Buffers. Any memory accesses after VERW execution can still remain in CPU buffers. It is safer to execute VERW late in return to user path to minimize the window in which kernel data can end up in CPU buffers. There are not many kernel secrets to be had after SWITCH_TO_USER_CR3. Add support for deploying VERW mitigation after user register state is restored. This helps minimize the chances of kernel data ending up into CPU buffers after executing VERW. Note that the mitigation at the new location is not yet enabled. Corner case not handled ======================= Interrupts returning to kernel don't clear CPUs buffers since the exit-to-user path is expected to do that anyways. But, there could be a case when an NMI is generated in kernel after the exit-to-user path has cleared the buffers. This case is not handled and NMI returning to kernel don't clear CPU buffers because: 1. It is rare to get an NMI after VERW, but before returning to userspace. 2. For an unprivileged user, there is no known way to make that NMI less rare or target it. 3. It would take a large number of these precisely-timed NMIs to mount an actual attack. There's presumably not enough bandwidth. 4. The NMI in question occurs after a VERW, i.e. when user state is restored and most interesting data is already scrubbed. Whats left is only the data that NMI touches, and that may or may not be of any interest. Suggested-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Pawan Gupta <pawan.kumar.gupta@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/all/20240213-delay-verw-v8-2-a6216d83edb7%40linux.intel.com
2024-02-13 18:21:52 -08:00
CLEAR_CPU_BUFFERS
sysretq
SYM_INNER_LABEL(entry_SYSRETQ_end, SYM_L_GLOBAL)
2022-05-20 10:26:04 +02:00
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR
int3
SYM_CODE_END(entry_SYSCALL_64)
/*
* %rdi: prev task
* %rsi: next task
*/
.pushsection .text, "ax"
SYM_FUNC_START(__switch_to_asm)
/*
* Save callee-saved registers
* This must match the order in inactive_task_frame
*/
pushq %rbp
pushq %rbx
pushq %r12
pushq %r13
pushq %r14
pushq %r15
/* switch stack */
movq %rsp, TASK_threadsp(%rdi)
movq TASK_threadsp(%rsi), %rsp
Kbuild: rename CC_STACKPROTECTOR[_STRONG] config variables The changes to automatically test for working stack protector compiler support in the Kconfig files removed the special STACKPROTECTOR_AUTO option that picked the strongest stack protector that the compiler supported. That was all a nice cleanup - it makes no sense to have the AUTO case now that the Kconfig phase can just determine the compiler support directly. HOWEVER. It also meant that doing "make oldconfig" would now _disable_ the strong stackprotector if you had AUTO enabled, because in a legacy config file, the sane stack protector configuration would look like CONFIG_HAVE_CC_STACKPROTECTOR=y # CONFIG_CC_STACKPROTECTOR_NONE is not set # CONFIG_CC_STACKPROTECTOR_REGULAR is not set # CONFIG_CC_STACKPROTECTOR_STRONG is not set CONFIG_CC_STACKPROTECTOR_AUTO=y and when you ran this through "make oldconfig" with the Kbuild changes, it would ask you about the regular CONFIG_CC_STACKPROTECTOR (that had been renamed from CONFIG_CC_STACKPROTECTOR_REGULAR to just CONFIG_CC_STACKPROTECTOR), but it would think that the STRONG version used to be disabled (because it was really enabled by AUTO), and would disable it in the new config, resulting in: CONFIG_HAVE_CC_STACKPROTECTOR=y CONFIG_CC_HAS_STACKPROTECTOR_NONE=y CONFIG_CC_STACKPROTECTOR=y # CONFIG_CC_STACKPROTECTOR_STRONG is not set CONFIG_CC_HAS_SANE_STACKPROTECTOR=y That's dangerously subtle - people could suddenly find themselves with the weaker stack protector setup without even realizing. The solution here is to just rename not just the old RECULAR stack protector option, but also the strong one. This does that by just removing the CC_ prefix entirely for the user choices, because it really is not about the compiler support (the compiler support now instead automatially impacts _visibility_ of the options to users). This results in "make oldconfig" actually asking the user for their choice, so that we don't have any silent subtle security model changes. The end result would generally look like this: CONFIG_HAVE_CC_STACKPROTECTOR=y CONFIG_CC_HAS_STACKPROTECTOR_NONE=y CONFIG_STACKPROTECTOR=y CONFIG_STACKPROTECTOR_STRONG=y CONFIG_CC_HAS_SANE_STACKPROTECTOR=y where the "CC_" versions really are about internal compiler infrastructure, not the user selections. Acked-by: Masahiro Yamada <yamada.masahiro@socionext.com> Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
2018-06-14 12:21:18 +09:00
#ifdef CONFIG_STACKPROTECTOR
movq TASK_stack_canary(%rsi), %rbx
movq %rbx, PER_CPU_VAR(fixed_percpu_data + FIXED_stack_canary)
#endif
x86/retpoline: Fill RSB on context switch for affected CPUs On context switch from a shallow call stack to a deeper one, as the CPU does 'ret' up the deeper side it may encounter RSB entries (predictions for where the 'ret' goes to) which were populated in userspace. This is problematic if neither SMEP nor KPTI (the latter of which marks userspace pages as NX for the kernel) are active, as malicious code in userspace may then be executed speculatively. Overwrite the CPU's return prediction stack with calls which are predicted to return to an infinite loop, to "capture" speculation if this happens. This is required both for retpoline, and also in conjunction with IBRS for !SMEP && !KPTI. On Skylake+ the problem is slightly different, and an *underflow* of the RSB may cause errant branch predictions to occur. So there it's not so much overwrite, as *filling* the RSB to attempt to prevent it getting empty. This is only a partial solution for Skylake+ since there are many other conditions which may result in the RSB becoming empty. The full solution on Skylake+ is to use IBRS, which will prevent the problem even when the RSB becomes empty. With IBRS, the RSB-stuffing will not be required on context switch. [ tglx: Added missing vendor check and slighty massaged comments and changelog ] Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <dwmw@amazon.co.uk> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Acked-by: Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com> Cc: gnomes@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Andi Kleen <ak@linux.intel.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: thomas.lendacky@amd.com Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Jiri Kosina <jikos@kernel.org> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Kees Cook <keescook@google.com> Cc: Tim Chen <tim.c.chen@linux.intel.com> Cc: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/1515779365-9032-1-git-send-email-dwmw@amazon.co.uk
2018-01-12 17:49:25 +00:00
/*
* When switching from a shallower to a deeper call stack
* the RSB may either underflow or use entries populated
* with userspace addresses. On CPUs where those concerns
* exist, overwrite the RSB with entries which capture
* speculative execution to prevent attack.
*/
FILL_RETURN_BUFFER %r12, RSB_CLEAR_LOOPS, X86_FEATURE_RSB_CTXSW
x86/retpoline: Fill RSB on context switch for affected CPUs On context switch from a shallow call stack to a deeper one, as the CPU does 'ret' up the deeper side it may encounter RSB entries (predictions for where the 'ret' goes to) which were populated in userspace. This is problematic if neither SMEP nor KPTI (the latter of which marks userspace pages as NX for the kernel) are active, as malicious code in userspace may then be executed speculatively. Overwrite the CPU's return prediction stack with calls which are predicted to return to an infinite loop, to "capture" speculation if this happens. This is required both for retpoline, and also in conjunction with IBRS for !SMEP && !KPTI. On Skylake+ the problem is slightly different, and an *underflow* of the RSB may cause errant branch predictions to occur. So there it's not so much overwrite, as *filling* the RSB to attempt to prevent it getting empty. This is only a partial solution for Skylake+ since there are many other conditions which may result in the RSB becoming empty. The full solution on Skylake+ is to use IBRS, which will prevent the problem even when the RSB becomes empty. With IBRS, the RSB-stuffing will not be required on context switch. [ tglx: Added missing vendor check and slighty massaged comments and changelog ] Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <dwmw@amazon.co.uk> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Acked-by: Arjan van de Ven <arjan@linux.intel.com> Cc: gnomes@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Andi Kleen <ak@linux.intel.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: thomas.lendacky@amd.com Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Jiri Kosina <jikos@kernel.org> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Kees Cook <keescook@google.com> Cc: Tim Chen <tim.c.chen@linux.intel.com> Cc: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/1515779365-9032-1-git-send-email-dwmw@amazon.co.uk
2018-01-12 17:49:25 +00:00
/* restore callee-saved registers */
popq %r15
popq %r14
popq %r13
popq %r12
popq %rbx
popq %rbp
jmp __switch_to
SYM_FUNC_END(__switch_to_asm)
.popsection
/*
* A newly forked process directly context switches into this address.
*
* rax: prev task we switched from
* rbx: kernel thread func (NULL for user thread)
* r12: kernel thread arg
*/
.pushsection .text, "ax"
SYM_CODE_START(ret_from_fork_asm)
/*
* This is the start of the kernel stack; even through there's a
* register set at the top, the regset isn't necessarily coherent
* (consider kthreads) and one cannot unwind further.
*
* This ensures stack unwinds of kernel threads terminate in a known
* good state.
*/
UNWIND_HINT_END_OF_STACK
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR // copy_thread
x86/retbleed: Add SKL return thunk To address the Intel SKL RSB underflow issue in software it's required to do call depth tracking. Provide a return thunk for call depth tracking on Intel SKL CPUs. The tracking does not use a counter. It uses uses arithmetic shift right on call entry and logical shift left on return. The depth tracking variable is initialized to 0x8000.... when the call depth is zero. The arithmetic shift right sign extends the MSB and saturates after the 12th call. The shift count is 5 so the tracking covers 12 nested calls. On return the variable is shifted left logically so it becomes zero again. CALL RET 0: 0x8000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 1: 0xfc00000000000000 0xf000000000000000 ... 11: 0xfffffffffffffff8 0xfffffffffffffc00 12: 0xffffffffffffffff 0xffffffffffffffe0 After a return buffer fill the depth is credited 12 calls before the next stuffing has to take place. There is a inaccuracy for situations like this: 10 calls 5 returns 3 calls 4 returns 3 calls .... The shift count might cause this to be off by one in either direction, but there is still a cushion vs. the RSB depth. The algorithm does not claim to be perfect, but it should obfuscate the problem enough to make exploitation extremly difficult. The theory behind this is: RSB is a stack with depth 16 which is filled on every call. On the return path speculation "pops" entries to speculate down the call chain. Once the speculative RSB is empty it switches to other predictors, e.g. the Branch History Buffer, which can be mistrained by user space and misguide the speculation path to a gadget. Call depth tracking is designed to break this speculation path by stuffing speculation trap calls into the RSB which are never getting a corresponding return executed. This stalls the prediction path until it gets resteered, The assumption is that stuffing at the 12th return is sufficient to break the speculation before it hits the underflow and the fallback to the other predictors. Testing confirms that it works. Johannes, one of the retbleed researchers. tried to attack this approach but failed. There is obviously no scientific proof that this will withstand future research progress, but all we can do right now is to speculate about it. The SAR/SHL usage was suggested by Andi Kleen. Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/20220915111147.890071690@infradead.org
2022-09-15 13:11:27 +02:00
CALL_DEPTH_ACCOUNT
movq %rax, %rdi /* prev */
movq %rsp, %rsi /* regs */
movq %rbx, %rdx /* fn */
movq %r12, %rcx /* fn_arg */
call ret_from_fork
/*
* Set the stack state to what is expected for the target function
* -- at this point the register set should be a valid user set
* and unwind should work normally.
*/
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
#ifdef CONFIG_X86_FRED
ALTERNATIVE "jmp swapgs_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode", \
"jmp asm_fred_exit_user", X86_FEATURE_FRED
#else
jmp swapgs_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode
#endif
SYM_CODE_END(ret_from_fork_asm)
.popsection
.macro DEBUG_ENTRY_ASSERT_IRQS_OFF
#ifdef CONFIG_DEBUG_ENTRY
2017-12-04 15:07:07 +01:00
pushq %rax
SAVE_FLAGS
2017-12-04 15:07:07 +01:00
testl $X86_EFLAGS_IF, %eax
jz .Lokay_\@
ud2
.Lokay_\@:
2017-12-04 15:07:07 +01:00
popq %rax
#endif
.endm
SYM_CODE_START(xen_error_entry)
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR
UNWIND_HINT_FUNC
PUSH_AND_CLEAR_REGS save_ret=1
ENCODE_FRAME_POINTER 8
x86/retbleed: Add SKL return thunk To address the Intel SKL RSB underflow issue in software it's required to do call depth tracking. Provide a return thunk for call depth tracking on Intel SKL CPUs. The tracking does not use a counter. It uses uses arithmetic shift right on call entry and logical shift left on return. The depth tracking variable is initialized to 0x8000.... when the call depth is zero. The arithmetic shift right sign extends the MSB and saturates after the 12th call. The shift count is 5 so the tracking covers 12 nested calls. On return the variable is shifted left logically so it becomes zero again. CALL RET 0: 0x8000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 1: 0xfc00000000000000 0xf000000000000000 ... 11: 0xfffffffffffffff8 0xfffffffffffffc00 12: 0xffffffffffffffff 0xffffffffffffffe0 After a return buffer fill the depth is credited 12 calls before the next stuffing has to take place. There is a inaccuracy for situations like this: 10 calls 5 returns 3 calls 4 returns 3 calls .... The shift count might cause this to be off by one in either direction, but there is still a cushion vs. the RSB depth. The algorithm does not claim to be perfect, but it should obfuscate the problem enough to make exploitation extremly difficult. The theory behind this is: RSB is a stack with depth 16 which is filled on every call. On the return path speculation "pops" entries to speculate down the call chain. Once the speculative RSB is empty it switches to other predictors, e.g. the Branch History Buffer, which can be mistrained by user space and misguide the speculation path to a gadget. Call depth tracking is designed to break this speculation path by stuffing speculation trap calls into the RSB which are never getting a corresponding return executed. This stalls the prediction path until it gets resteered, The assumption is that stuffing at the 12th return is sufficient to break the speculation before it hits the underflow and the fallback to the other predictors. Testing confirms that it works. Johannes, one of the retbleed researchers. tried to attack this approach but failed. There is obviously no scientific proof that this will withstand future research progress, but all we can do right now is to speculate about it. The SAR/SHL usage was suggested by Andi Kleen. Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/20220915111147.890071690@infradead.org
2022-09-15 13:11:27 +02:00
UNTRAIN_RET_FROM_CALL
RET
SYM_CODE_END(xen_error_entry)
/**
* idtentry_body - Macro to emit code calling the C function
* @cfunc: C function to be called
* @has_error_code: Hardware pushed error code on stack
*/
.macro idtentry_body cfunc has_error_code:req
/*
* Call error_entry() and switch to the task stack if from userspace.
*
* When in XENPV, it is already in the task stack, and it can't fault
* for native_iret() nor native_load_gs_index() since XENPV uses its
* own pvops for IRET and load_gs_index(). And it doesn't need to
* switch the CR3. So it can skip invoking error_entry().
*/
ALTERNATIVE "call error_entry; movq %rax, %rsp", \
"call xen_error_entry", X86_FEATURE_XENPV
ENCODE_FRAME_POINTER
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
movq %rsp, %rdi /* pt_regs pointer into 1st argument*/
.if \has_error_code == 1
movq ORIG_RAX(%rsp), %rsi /* get error code into 2nd argument*/
movq $-1, ORIG_RAX(%rsp) /* no syscall to restart */
.endif
call \cfunc
/* For some configurations \cfunc ends up being a noreturn. */
REACHABLE
jmp error_return
.endm
/**
* idtentry - Macro to generate entry stubs for simple IDT entries
* @vector: Vector number
* @asmsym: ASM symbol for the entry point
* @cfunc: C function to be called
* @has_error_code: Hardware pushed error code on stack
*
* The macro emits code to set up the kernel context for straight forward
* and simple IDT entries. No IST stack, no paranoid entry checks.
*/
.macro idtentry vector asmsym cfunc has_error_code:req
SYM_CODE_START(\asmsym)
x86/entry: Fix unwinding from kprobe on PUSH/POP instruction If a kprobe (INT3) is set on a stack-modifying single-byte instruction, like a single-byte PUSH/POP or a LEAVE, ORC fails to unwind past it: Call Trace: <TASK> dump_stack_lvl+0x57/0x90 handler_pre+0x33/0x40 [kprobe_example] aggr_pre_handler+0x49/0x90 kprobe_int3_handler+0xe3/0x180 do_int3+0x3a/0x80 exc_int3+0x7d/0xc0 asm_exc_int3+0x35/0x40 RIP: 0010:kernel_clone+0xe/0x3a0 Code: cc e8 16 b2 bf 00 66 0f 1f 44 00 00 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 0f 1f 44 00 00 41 57 41 56 41 55 41 54 cc <53> 48 89 fb 48 83 ec 68 4c 8b 27 65 48 8b 04 25 28 00 00 00 48 89 RSP: 0018:ffffc9000074fda0 EFLAGS: 00000206 RAX: 0000000000808100 RBX: ffff888109de9d80 RCX: 0000000000000000 RDX: 0000000000000011 RSI: ffff888109de9d80 RDI: ffffc9000074fdc8 RBP: ffff8881019543c0 R08: ffffffff81127e30 R09: 00000000e71742a5 R10: ffff888104764a18 R11: 0000000071742a5e R12: ffff888100078800 R13: ffff888100126000 R14: 0000000000000000 R15: ffff888100126005 ? __pfx_call_usermodehelper_exec_async+0x10/0x10 ? kernel_clone+0xe/0x3a0 ? user_mode_thread+0x5b/0x80 ? __pfx_call_usermodehelper_exec_async+0x10/0x10 ? call_usermodehelper_exec_work+0x77/0xb0 ? process_one_work+0x299/0x5f0 ? worker_thread+0x4f/0x3a0 ? __pfx_worker_thread+0x10/0x10 ? kthread+0xf2/0x120 ? __pfx_kthread+0x10/0x10 ? ret_from_fork+0x29/0x50 </TASK> The problem is that #BP saves the pointer to the instruction immediately *after* the INT3, rather than to the INT3 itself. The instruction replaced by the INT3 hasn't actually run, but ORC assumes otherwise and expects the wrong stack layout. Fix it by annotating the #BP exception as a non-signal stack frame, which tells the ORC unwinder to decrement the instruction pointer before looking up the corresponding ORC entry. Reported-by: Chen Zhongjin <chenzhongjin@huawei.com> Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/baafcd3cc1abb14cb757fe081fa696012a5265ee.1676068346.git.jpoimboe@kernel.org
2023-02-10 14:42:02 -08:00
.if \vector == X86_TRAP_BP
/* #BP advances %rip to the next instruction */
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_ENTRY offset=\has_error_code*8 signal=0
x86/entry: Fix unwinding from kprobe on PUSH/POP instruction If a kprobe (INT3) is set on a stack-modifying single-byte instruction, like a single-byte PUSH/POP or a LEAVE, ORC fails to unwind past it: Call Trace: <TASK> dump_stack_lvl+0x57/0x90 handler_pre+0x33/0x40 [kprobe_example] aggr_pre_handler+0x49/0x90 kprobe_int3_handler+0xe3/0x180 do_int3+0x3a/0x80 exc_int3+0x7d/0xc0 asm_exc_int3+0x35/0x40 RIP: 0010:kernel_clone+0xe/0x3a0 Code: cc e8 16 b2 bf 00 66 0f 1f 44 00 00 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 0f 1f 44 00 00 41 57 41 56 41 55 41 54 cc <53> 48 89 fb 48 83 ec 68 4c 8b 27 65 48 8b 04 25 28 00 00 00 48 89 RSP: 0018:ffffc9000074fda0 EFLAGS: 00000206 RAX: 0000000000808100 RBX: ffff888109de9d80 RCX: 0000000000000000 RDX: 0000000000000011 RSI: ffff888109de9d80 RDI: ffffc9000074fdc8 RBP: ffff8881019543c0 R08: ffffffff81127e30 R09: 00000000e71742a5 R10: ffff888104764a18 R11: 0000000071742a5e R12: ffff888100078800 R13: ffff888100126000 R14: 0000000000000000 R15: ffff888100126005 ? __pfx_call_usermodehelper_exec_async+0x10/0x10 ? kernel_clone+0xe/0x3a0 ? user_mode_thread+0x5b/0x80 ? __pfx_call_usermodehelper_exec_async+0x10/0x10 ? call_usermodehelper_exec_work+0x77/0xb0 ? process_one_work+0x299/0x5f0 ? worker_thread+0x4f/0x3a0 ? __pfx_worker_thread+0x10/0x10 ? kthread+0xf2/0x120 ? __pfx_kthread+0x10/0x10 ? ret_from_fork+0x29/0x50 </TASK> The problem is that #BP saves the pointer to the instruction immediately *after* the INT3, rather than to the INT3 itself. The instruction replaced by the INT3 hasn't actually run, but ORC assumes otherwise and expects the wrong stack layout. Fix it by annotating the #BP exception as a non-signal stack frame, which tells the ORC unwinder to decrement the instruction pointer before looking up the corresponding ORC entry. Reported-by: Chen Zhongjin <chenzhongjin@huawei.com> Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/baafcd3cc1abb14cb757fe081fa696012a5265ee.1676068346.git.jpoimboe@kernel.org
2023-02-10 14:42:02 -08:00
.else
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_ENTRY offset=\has_error_code*8
x86/entry: Fix unwinding from kprobe on PUSH/POP instruction If a kprobe (INT3) is set on a stack-modifying single-byte instruction, like a single-byte PUSH/POP or a LEAVE, ORC fails to unwind past it: Call Trace: <TASK> dump_stack_lvl+0x57/0x90 handler_pre+0x33/0x40 [kprobe_example] aggr_pre_handler+0x49/0x90 kprobe_int3_handler+0xe3/0x180 do_int3+0x3a/0x80 exc_int3+0x7d/0xc0 asm_exc_int3+0x35/0x40 RIP: 0010:kernel_clone+0xe/0x3a0 Code: cc e8 16 b2 bf 00 66 0f 1f 44 00 00 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 0f 1f 44 00 00 41 57 41 56 41 55 41 54 cc <53> 48 89 fb 48 83 ec 68 4c 8b 27 65 48 8b 04 25 28 00 00 00 48 89 RSP: 0018:ffffc9000074fda0 EFLAGS: 00000206 RAX: 0000000000808100 RBX: ffff888109de9d80 RCX: 0000000000000000 RDX: 0000000000000011 RSI: ffff888109de9d80 RDI: ffffc9000074fdc8 RBP: ffff8881019543c0 R08: ffffffff81127e30 R09: 00000000e71742a5 R10: ffff888104764a18 R11: 0000000071742a5e R12: ffff888100078800 R13: ffff888100126000 R14: 0000000000000000 R15: ffff888100126005 ? __pfx_call_usermodehelper_exec_async+0x10/0x10 ? kernel_clone+0xe/0x3a0 ? user_mode_thread+0x5b/0x80 ? __pfx_call_usermodehelper_exec_async+0x10/0x10 ? call_usermodehelper_exec_work+0x77/0xb0 ? process_one_work+0x299/0x5f0 ? worker_thread+0x4f/0x3a0 ? __pfx_worker_thread+0x10/0x10 ? kthread+0xf2/0x120 ? __pfx_kthread+0x10/0x10 ? ret_from_fork+0x29/0x50 </TASK> The problem is that #BP saves the pointer to the instruction immediately *after* the INT3, rather than to the INT3 itself. The instruction replaced by the INT3 hasn't actually run, but ORC assumes otherwise and expects the wrong stack layout. Fix it by annotating the #BP exception as a non-signal stack frame, which tells the ORC unwinder to decrement the instruction pointer before looking up the corresponding ORC entry. Reported-by: Chen Zhongjin <chenzhongjin@huawei.com> Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/baafcd3cc1abb14cb757fe081fa696012a5265ee.1676068346.git.jpoimboe@kernel.org
2023-02-10 14:42:02 -08:00
.endif
ENDBR
ASM_CLAC
cld
.if \has_error_code == 0
pushq $-1 /* ORIG_RAX: no syscall to restart */
.endif
.if \vector == X86_TRAP_BP
/*
* If coming from kernel space, create a 6-word gap to allow the
* int3 handler to emulate a call instruction.
*/
testb $3, CS-ORIG_RAX(%rsp)
jnz .Lfrom_usermode_no_gap_\@
.rept 6
pushq 5*8(%rsp)
.endr
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS offset=8
.Lfrom_usermode_no_gap_\@:
.endif
idtentry_body \cfunc \has_error_code
_ASM_NOKPROBE(\asmsym)
SYM_CODE_END(\asmsym)
.endm
/*
* Interrupt entry/exit.
*
+ The interrupt stubs push (vector) onto the stack, which is the error_code
* position of idtentry exceptions, and jump to one of the two idtentry points
* (common/spurious).
*
* common_interrupt is a hotpath, align it to a cache line
*/
.macro idtentry_irq vector cfunc
.p2align CONFIG_X86_L1_CACHE_SHIFT
idtentry \vector asm_\cfunc \cfunc has_error_code=1
.endm
/**
* idtentry_mce_db - Macro to generate entry stubs for #MC and #DB
* @vector: Vector number
* @asmsym: ASM symbol for the entry point
* @cfunc: C function to be called
*
* The macro emits code to set up the kernel context for #MC and #DB
*
* If the entry comes from user space it uses the normal entry path
* including the return to user space work and preemption checks on
* exit.
*
* If hits in kernel mode then it needs to go through the paranoid
* entry as the exception can hit any random state. No preemption
* check on exit to keep the paranoid path simple.
*/
.macro idtentry_mce_db vector asmsym cfunc
SYM_CODE_START(\asmsym)
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_ENTRY
ENDBR
ASM_CLAC
cld
pushq $-1 /* ORIG_RAX: no syscall to restart */
/*
* If the entry is from userspace, switch stacks and treat it as
* a normal entry.
*/
testb $3, CS-ORIG_RAX(%rsp)
jnz .Lfrom_usermode_switch_stack_\@
/* paranoid_entry returns GS information for paranoid_exit in EBX. */
call paranoid_entry
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
movq %rsp, %rdi /* pt_regs pointer */
call \cfunc
jmp paranoid_exit
/* Switch to the regular task stack and use the noist entry point */
.Lfrom_usermode_switch_stack_\@:
idtentry_body noist_\cfunc, has_error_code=0
_ASM_NOKPROBE(\asmsym)
SYM_CODE_END(\asmsym)
.endm
#ifdef CONFIG_AMD_MEM_ENCRYPT
/**
* idtentry_vc - Macro to generate entry stub for #VC
* @vector: Vector number
* @asmsym: ASM symbol for the entry point
* @cfunc: C function to be called
*
* The macro emits code to set up the kernel context for #VC. The #VC handler
* runs on an IST stack and needs to be able to cause nested #VC exceptions.
*
* To make this work the #VC entry code tries its best to pretend it doesn't use
* an IST stack by switching to the task stack if coming from user-space (which
* includes early SYSCALL entry path) or back to the stack in the IRET frame if
* entered from kernel-mode.
*
* If entered from kernel-mode the return stack is validated first, and if it is
* not safe to use (e.g. because it points to the entry stack) the #VC handler
* will switch to a fall-back stack (VC2) and call a special handler function.
*
* The macro is only used for one vector, but it is planned to be extended in
* the future for the #HV exception.
*/
.macro idtentry_vc vector asmsym cfunc
SYM_CODE_START(\asmsym)
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_ENTRY
ENDBR
ASM_CLAC
cld
/*
* If the entry is from userspace, switch stacks and treat it as
* a normal entry.
*/
testb $3, CS-ORIG_RAX(%rsp)
jnz .Lfrom_usermode_switch_stack_\@
/*
* paranoid_entry returns SWAPGS flag for paranoid_exit in EBX.
* EBX == 0 -> SWAPGS, EBX == 1 -> no SWAPGS
*/
call paranoid_entry
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
/*
* Switch off the IST stack to make it free for nested exceptions. The
* vc_switch_off_ist() function will switch back to the interrupted
* stack if it is safe to do so. If not it switches to the VC fall-back
* stack.
*/
movq %rsp, %rdi /* pt_regs pointer */
call vc_switch_off_ist
movq %rax, %rsp /* Switch to new stack */
x86/sev: Annotate stack change in the #VC handler In idtentry_vc(), vc_switch_off_ist() determines a safe stack to switch to, off of the IST stack. Annotate the new stack switch with ENCODE_FRAME_POINTER in case UNWINDER_FRAME_POINTER is used. A stack walk before looks like this: CPU: 0 PID: 0 Comm: swapper Not tainted 5.18.0-rc7+ #2 Hardware name: QEMU Standard PC (Q35 + ICH9, 2009), BIOS 0.0.0 02/06/2015 Call Trace: <TASK> dump_stack_lvl dump_stack kernel_exc_vmm_communication asm_exc_vmm_communication ? native_read_msr ? __x2apic_disable.part.0 ? x2apic_setup ? cpu_init ? trap_init ? start_kernel ? x86_64_start_reservations ? x86_64_start_kernel ? secondary_startup_64_no_verify </TASK> and with the fix, the stack dump is exact: CPU: 0 PID: 0 Comm: swapper Not tainted 5.18.0-rc7+ #3 Hardware name: QEMU Standard PC (Q35 + ICH9, 2009), BIOS 0.0.0 02/06/2015 Call Trace: <TASK> dump_stack_lvl dump_stack kernel_exc_vmm_communication asm_exc_vmm_communication RIP: 0010:native_read_msr Code: ... < snipped regs > ? __x2apic_disable.part.0 x2apic_setup cpu_init trap_init start_kernel x86_64_start_reservations x86_64_start_kernel secondary_startup_64_no_verify </TASK> [ bp: Test in a SEV-ES guest and rewrite the commit message to explain what exactly this does. ] Fixes: a13644f3a53d ("x86/entry/64: Add entry code for #VC handler") Signed-off-by: Lai Jiangshan <jiangshan.ljs@antgroup.com> Signed-off-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Acked-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/20220316041612.71357-1-jiangshanlai@gmail.com
2022-03-16 12:16:12 +08:00
ENCODE_FRAME_POINTER
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
/* Update pt_regs */
movq ORIG_RAX(%rsp), %rsi /* get error code into 2nd argument*/
movq $-1, ORIG_RAX(%rsp) /* no syscall to restart */
movq %rsp, %rdi /* pt_regs pointer */
call kernel_\cfunc
/*
* No need to switch back to the IST stack. The current stack is either
* identical to the stack in the IRET frame or the VC fall-back stack,
* so it is definitely mapped even with PTI enabled.
*/
jmp paranoid_exit
/* Switch to the regular task stack */
.Lfrom_usermode_switch_stack_\@:
idtentry_body user_\cfunc, has_error_code=1
_ASM_NOKPROBE(\asmsym)
SYM_CODE_END(\asmsym)
.endm
#endif
/*
* Double fault entry. Straight paranoid. No checks from which context
* this comes because for the espfix induced #DF this would do the wrong
* thing.
*/
.macro idtentry_df vector asmsym cfunc
SYM_CODE_START(\asmsym)
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_ENTRY offset=8
ENDBR
ASM_CLAC
cld
/* paranoid_entry returns GS information for paranoid_exit in EBX. */
call paranoid_entry
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
movq %rsp, %rdi /* pt_regs pointer into first argument */
movq ORIG_RAX(%rsp), %rsi /* get error code into 2nd argument*/
movq $-1, ORIG_RAX(%rsp) /* no syscall to restart */
call \cfunc
/* For some configurations \cfunc ends up being a noreturn. */
REACHABLE
jmp paranoid_exit
_ASM_NOKPROBE(\asmsym)
SYM_CODE_END(\asmsym)
.endm
/*
* Include the defines which emit the idt entries which are shared
* shared between 32 and 64 bit and emit the __irqentry_text_* markers
* so the stacktrace boundary checks work.
*/
__ALIGN
.globl __irqentry_text_start
__irqentry_text_start:
#include <asm/idtentry.h>
__ALIGN
.globl __irqentry_text_end
__irqentry_text_end:
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR
SYM_CODE_START_LOCAL(common_interrupt_return)
SYM_INNER_LABEL(swapgs_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode, SYM_L_GLOBAL)
IBRS_EXIT
#ifdef CONFIG_XEN_PV
ALTERNATIVE "", "jmp xenpv_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode", X86_FEATURE_XENPV
#endif
#ifdef CONFIG_MITIGATION_PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION
ALTERNATIVE "", "jmp .Lpti_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode", X86_FEATURE_PTI
#endif
STACKLEAK_ERASE
POP_REGS
add $8, %rsp /* orig_ax */
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS
.Lswapgs_and_iret:
swapgs
x86/entry_64: Add VERW just before userspace transition Mitigation for MDS is to use VERW instruction to clear any secrets in CPU Buffers. Any memory accesses after VERW execution can still remain in CPU buffers. It is safer to execute VERW late in return to user path to minimize the window in which kernel data can end up in CPU buffers. There are not many kernel secrets to be had after SWITCH_TO_USER_CR3. Add support for deploying VERW mitigation after user register state is restored. This helps minimize the chances of kernel data ending up into CPU buffers after executing VERW. Note that the mitigation at the new location is not yet enabled. Corner case not handled ======================= Interrupts returning to kernel don't clear CPUs buffers since the exit-to-user path is expected to do that anyways. But, there could be a case when an NMI is generated in kernel after the exit-to-user path has cleared the buffers. This case is not handled and NMI returning to kernel don't clear CPU buffers because: 1. It is rare to get an NMI after VERW, but before returning to userspace. 2. For an unprivileged user, there is no known way to make that NMI less rare or target it. 3. It would take a large number of these precisely-timed NMIs to mount an actual attack. There's presumably not enough bandwidth. 4. The NMI in question occurs after a VERW, i.e. when user state is restored and most interesting data is already scrubbed. Whats left is only the data that NMI touches, and that may or may not be of any interest. Suggested-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Pawan Gupta <pawan.kumar.gupta@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/all/20240213-delay-verw-v8-2-a6216d83edb7%40linux.intel.com
2024-02-13 18:21:52 -08:00
CLEAR_CPU_BUFFERS
/* Assert that the IRET frame indicates user mode. */
testb $3, 8(%rsp)
jnz .Lnative_iret
ud2
#ifdef CONFIG_MITIGATION_PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION
.Lpti_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode:
POP_REGS pop_rdi=0
x86/entry/64: Return to userspace from the trampoline stack By itself, this is useless. It gives us the ability to run some final code before exit that cannnot run on the kernel stack. This could include a CR3 switch a la PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION or some kernel stack erasing, for example. (Or even weird things like *changing* which kernel stack gets used as an ASLR-strengthening mechanism.) The SYSRET32 path is not covered yet. It could be in the future or we could just ignore it and force the slow path if needed. Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.306546484@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:24 +01:00
/*
* The stack is now user RDI, orig_ax, RIP, CS, EFLAGS, RSP, SS.
* Save old stack pointer and switch to trampoline stack.
*/
movq %rsp, %rdi
x86/entry/64: Make cpu_entry_area.tss read-only The TSS is a fairly juicy target for exploits, and, now that the TSS is in the cpu_entry_area, it's no longer protected by kASLR. Make it read-only on x86_64. On x86_32, it can't be RO because it's written by the CPU during task switches, and we use a task gate for double faults. I'd also be nervous about errata if we tried to make it RO even on configurations without double fault handling. [ tglx: AMD confirmed that there is no problem on 64-bit with TSS RO. So it's probably safe to assume that it's a non issue, though Intel might have been creative in that area. Still waiting for confirmation. ] Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Kees Cook <keescook@chromium.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.733700132@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:29 +01:00
movq PER_CPU_VAR(cpu_tss_rw + TSS_sp0), %rsp
UNWIND_HINT_END_OF_STACK
x86/entry/64: Return to userspace from the trampoline stack By itself, this is useless. It gives us the ability to run some final code before exit that cannnot run on the kernel stack. This could include a CR3 switch a la PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION or some kernel stack erasing, for example. (Or even weird things like *changing* which kernel stack gets used as an ASLR-strengthening mechanism.) The SYSRET32 path is not covered yet. It could be in the future or we could just ignore it and force the slow path if needed. Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.306546484@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:24 +01:00
/* Copy the IRET frame to the trampoline stack. */
pushq 6*8(%rdi) /* SS */
pushq 5*8(%rdi) /* RSP */
pushq 4*8(%rdi) /* EFLAGS */
pushq 3*8(%rdi) /* CS */
pushq 2*8(%rdi) /* RIP */
/* Push user RDI on the trampoline stack. */
pushq (%rdi)
/*
* We are on the trampoline stack. All regs except RDI are live.
* We can do future final exit work right here.
*/
x86/entry: Add STACKLEAK erasing the kernel stack at the end of syscalls The STACKLEAK feature (initially developed by PaX Team) has the following benefits: 1. Reduces the information that can be revealed through kernel stack leak bugs. The idea of erasing the thread stack at the end of syscalls is similar to CONFIG_PAGE_POISONING and memzero_explicit() in kernel crypto, which all comply with FDP_RIP.2 (Full Residual Information Protection) of the Common Criteria standard. 2. Blocks some uninitialized stack variable attacks (e.g. CVE-2017-17712, CVE-2010-2963). That kind of bugs should be killed by improving C compilers in future, which might take a long time. This commit introduces the code filling the used part of the kernel stack with a poison value before returning to userspace. Full STACKLEAK feature also contains the gcc plugin which comes in a separate commit. The STACKLEAK feature is ported from grsecurity/PaX. More information at: https://grsecurity.net/ https://pax.grsecurity.net/ This code is modified from Brad Spengler/PaX Team's code in the last public patch of grsecurity/PaX based on our understanding of the code. Changes or omissions from the original code are ours and don't reflect the original grsecurity/PaX code. Performance impact: Hardware: Intel Core i7-4770, 16 GB RAM Test #1: building the Linux kernel on a single core 0.91% slowdown Test #2: hackbench -s 4096 -l 2000 -g 15 -f 25 -P 4.2% slowdown So the STACKLEAK description in Kconfig includes: "The tradeoff is the performance impact: on a single CPU system kernel compilation sees a 1% slowdown, other systems and workloads may vary and you are advised to test this feature on your expected workload before deploying it". Signed-off-by: Alexander Popov <alex.popov@linux.com> Acked-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Acked-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Kees Cook <keescook@chromium.org>
2018-08-17 01:16:58 +03:00
STACKLEAK_ERASE_NOCLOBBER
x86/entry/64: Return to userspace from the trampoline stack By itself, this is useless. It gives us the ability to run some final code before exit that cannnot run on the kernel stack. This could include a CR3 switch a la PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION or some kernel stack erasing, for example. (Or even weird things like *changing* which kernel stack gets used as an ASLR-strengthening mechanism.) The SYSRET32 path is not covered yet. It could be in the future or we could just ignore it and force the slow path if needed. Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.306546484@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:24 +01:00
push %rax
SWITCH_TO_USER_CR3 scratch_reg=%rdi scratch_reg2=%rax
pop %rax
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
x86/entry/64: Return to userspace from the trampoline stack By itself, this is useless. It gives us the ability to run some final code before exit that cannnot run on the kernel stack. This could include a CR3 switch a la PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION or some kernel stack erasing, for example. (Or even weird things like *changing* which kernel stack gets used as an ASLR-strengthening mechanism.) The SYSRET32 path is not covered yet. It could be in the future or we could just ignore it and force the slow path if needed. Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.306546484@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:24 +01:00
/* Restore RDI. */
popq %rdi
jmp .Lswapgs_and_iret
#endif
SYM_INNER_LABEL(restore_regs_and_return_to_kernel, SYM_L_GLOBAL)
#ifdef CONFIG_DEBUG_ENTRY
/* Assert that pt_regs indicates kernel mode. */
testb $3, CS(%rsp)
jz 1f
ud2
1:
#endif
POP_REGS
addq $8, %rsp /* skip regs->orig_ax */
membarrier/x86: Provide core serializing command There are two places where core serialization is needed by membarrier: 1) When returning from the membarrier IPI, 2) After scheduler updates curr to a thread with a different mm, before going back to user-space, since the curr->mm is used by membarrier to check whether it needs to send an IPI to that CPU. x86-32 uses IRET as return from interrupt, and both IRET and SYSEXIT to go back to user-space. The IRET instruction is core serializing, but not SYSEXIT. x86-64 uses IRET as return from interrupt, which takes care of the IPI. However, it can return to user-space through either SYSRETL (compat code), SYSRETQ, or IRET. Given that SYSRET{L,Q} is not core serializing, we rely instead on write_cr3() performed by switch_mm() to provide core serialization after changing the current mm, and deal with the special case of kthread -> uthread (temporarily keeping current mm into active_mm) by adding a sync_core() in that specific case. Use the new sync_core_before_usermode() to guarantee this. Signed-off-by: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Acked-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Acked-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Andrea Parri <parri.andrea@gmail.com> Cc: Andrew Hunter <ahh@google.com> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Avi Kivity <avi@scylladb.com> Cc: Benjamin Herrenschmidt <benh@kernel.crashing.org> Cc: Boqun Feng <boqun.feng@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Watson <davejwatson@fb.com> Cc: David Sehr <sehr@google.com> Cc: Greg Hackmann <ghackmann@google.com> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Maged Michael <maged.michael@gmail.com> Cc: Michael Ellerman <mpe@ellerman.id.au> Cc: Paul E. McKenney <paulmck@linux.vnet.ibm.com> Cc: Paul Mackerras <paulus@samba.org> Cc: Russell King <linux@armlinux.org.uk> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: linux-api@vger.kernel.org Cc: linux-arch@vger.kernel.org Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/20180129202020.8515-10-mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2018-01-29 15:20:18 -05:00
/*
* ARCH_HAS_MEMBARRIER_SYNC_CORE rely on IRET core serialization
* when returning from IPI handler.
*/
#ifdef CONFIG_XEN_PV
SYM_INNER_LABEL(early_xen_iret_patch, SYM_L_GLOBAL)
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR
.byte 0xe9
.long .Lnative_iret - (. + 4)
#endif
.Lnative_iret:
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS
x86-64, espfix: Don't leak bits 31:16 of %esp returning to 16-bit stack The IRET instruction, when returning to a 16-bit segment, only restores the bottom 16 bits of the user space stack pointer. This causes some 16-bit software to break, but it also leaks kernel state to user space. We have a software workaround for that ("espfix") for the 32-bit kernel, but it relies on a nonzero stack segment base which is not available in 64-bit mode. In checkin: b3b42ac2cbae x86-64, modify_ldt: Ban 16-bit segments on 64-bit kernels we "solved" this by forbidding 16-bit segments on 64-bit kernels, with the logic that 16-bit support is crippled on 64-bit kernels anyway (no V86 support), but it turns out that people are doing stuff like running old Win16 binaries under Wine and expect it to work. This works around this by creating percpu "ministacks", each of which is mapped 2^16 times 64K apart. When we detect that the return SS is on the LDT, we copy the IRET frame to the ministack and use the relevant alias to return to userspace. The ministacks are mapped readonly, so if IRET faults we promote #GP to #DF which is an IST vector and thus has its own stack; we then do the fixup in the #DF handler. (Making #GP an IST exception would make the msr_safe functions unsafe in NMI/MC context, and quite possibly have other effects.) Special thanks to: - Andy Lutomirski, for the suggestion of using very small stack slots and copy (as opposed to map) the IRET frame there, and for the suggestion to mark them readonly and let the fault promote to #DF. - Konrad Wilk for paravirt fixup and testing. - Borislav Petkov for testing help and useful comments. Reported-by: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/1398816946-3351-1-git-send-email-hpa@linux.intel.com Cc: Konrad Rzeszutek Wilk <konrad.wilk@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Andrew Lutomriski <amluto@gmail.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org> Cc: Arjan van de Ven <arjan.van.de.ven@intel.com> Cc: comex <comexk@gmail.com> Cc: Alexander van Heukelum <heukelum@fastmail.fm> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # consider after upstream merge
2014-04-29 16:46:09 -07:00
/*
* Are we returning to a stack segment from the LDT? Note: in
* 64-bit mode SS:RSP on the exception stack is always valid.
*/
#ifdef CONFIG_X86_ESPFIX64
testb $4, (SS-RIP)(%rsp)
jnz native_irq_return_ldt
#endif
x86-64, espfix: Don't leak bits 31:16 of %esp returning to 16-bit stack The IRET instruction, when returning to a 16-bit segment, only restores the bottom 16 bits of the user space stack pointer. This causes some 16-bit software to break, but it also leaks kernel state to user space. We have a software workaround for that ("espfix") for the 32-bit kernel, but it relies on a nonzero stack segment base which is not available in 64-bit mode. In checkin: b3b42ac2cbae x86-64, modify_ldt: Ban 16-bit segments on 64-bit kernels we "solved" this by forbidding 16-bit segments on 64-bit kernels, with the logic that 16-bit support is crippled on 64-bit kernels anyway (no V86 support), but it turns out that people are doing stuff like running old Win16 binaries under Wine and expect it to work. This works around this by creating percpu "ministacks", each of which is mapped 2^16 times 64K apart. When we detect that the return SS is on the LDT, we copy the IRET frame to the ministack and use the relevant alias to return to userspace. The ministacks are mapped readonly, so if IRET faults we promote #GP to #DF which is an IST vector and thus has its own stack; we then do the fixup in the #DF handler. (Making #GP an IST exception would make the msr_safe functions unsafe in NMI/MC context, and quite possibly have other effects.) Special thanks to: - Andy Lutomirski, for the suggestion of using very small stack slots and copy (as opposed to map) the IRET frame there, and for the suggestion to mark them readonly and let the fault promote to #DF. - Konrad Wilk for paravirt fixup and testing. - Borislav Petkov for testing help and useful comments. Reported-by: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/1398816946-3351-1-git-send-email-hpa@linux.intel.com Cc: Konrad Rzeszutek Wilk <konrad.wilk@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Andrew Lutomriski <amluto@gmail.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org> Cc: Arjan van de Ven <arjan.van.de.ven@intel.com> Cc: comex <comexk@gmail.com> Cc: Alexander van Heukelum <heukelum@fastmail.fm> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # consider after upstream merge
2014-04-29 16:46:09 -07:00
SYM_INNER_LABEL(native_irq_return_iret, SYM_L_GLOBAL)
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR // exc_double_fault
/*
* This may fault. Non-paranoid faults on return to userspace are
* handled by fixup_bad_iret. These include #SS, #GP, and #NP.
* Double-faults due to espfix64 are handled in exc_double_fault.
* Other faults here are fatal.
*/
iretq
#ifdef CONFIG_X86_ESPFIX64
native_irq_return_ldt:
/*
* We are running with user GSBASE. All GPRs contain their user
* values. We have a percpu ESPFIX stack that is eight slots
* long (see ESPFIX_STACK_SIZE). espfix_waddr points to the bottom
* of the ESPFIX stack.
*
* We clobber RAX and RDI in this code. We stash RDI on the
* normal stack and RAX on the ESPFIX stack.
*
* The ESPFIX stack layout we set up looks like this:
*
* --- top of ESPFIX stack ---
* SS
* RSP
* RFLAGS
* CS
* RIP <-- RSP points here when we're done
* RAX <-- espfix_waddr points here
* --- bottom of ESPFIX stack ---
*/
pushq %rdi /* Stash user RDI */
swapgs /* to kernel GS */
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3 scratch_reg=%rdi /* to kernel CR3 */
movq PER_CPU_VAR(espfix_waddr), %rdi
movq %rax, (0*8)(%rdi) /* user RAX */
movq (1*8)(%rsp), %rax /* user RIP */
movq %rax, (1*8)(%rdi)
movq (2*8)(%rsp), %rax /* user CS */
movq %rax, (2*8)(%rdi)
movq (3*8)(%rsp), %rax /* user RFLAGS */
movq %rax, (3*8)(%rdi)
movq (5*8)(%rsp), %rax /* user SS */
movq %rax, (5*8)(%rdi)
movq (4*8)(%rsp), %rax /* user RSP */
movq %rax, (4*8)(%rdi)
/* Now RAX == RSP. */
andl $0xffff0000, %eax /* RAX = (RSP & 0xffff0000) */
/*
* espfix_stack[31:16] == 0. The page tables are set up such that
* (espfix_stack | (X & 0xffff0000)) points to a read-only alias of
* espfix_waddr for any X. That is, there are 65536 RO aliases of
* the same page. Set up RSP so that RSP[31:16] contains the
* respective 16 bits of the /userspace/ RSP and RSP nonetheless
* still points to an RO alias of the ESPFIX stack.
*/
orq PER_CPU_VAR(espfix_stack), %rax
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
x86/mm: Use/Fix PCID to optimize user/kernel switches We can use PCID to retain the TLBs across CR3 switches; including those now part of the user/kernel switch. This increases performance of kernel entry/exit at the cost of more expensive/complicated TLB flushing. Now that we have two address spaces, one for kernel and one for user space, we need two PCIDs per mm. We use the top PCID bit to indicate a user PCID (just like we use the PFN LSB for the PGD). Since we do TLB invalidation from kernel space, the existing code will only invalidate the kernel PCID, we augment that by marking the corresponding user PCID invalid, and upon switching back to userspace, use a flushing CR3 write for the switch. In order to access the user_pcid_flush_mask we use PER_CPU storage, which means the previously established SWAPGS vs CR3 ordering is now mandatory and required. Having to do this memory access does require additional registers, most sites have a functioning stack and we can spill one (RAX), sites without functional stack need to otherwise provide the second scratch register. Note: PCID is generally available on Intel Sandybridge and later CPUs. Note: Up until this point TLB flushing was broken in this series. Based-on-code-from: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:59 +01:00
SWITCH_TO_USER_CR3_STACK scratch_reg=%rdi
swapgs /* to user GS */
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
popq %rdi /* Restore user RDI */
movq %rax, %rsp
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS offset=8
/*
* At this point, we cannot write to the stack any more, but we can
* still read.
*/
popq %rax /* Restore user RAX */
x86/entry_64: Add VERW just before userspace transition Mitigation for MDS is to use VERW instruction to clear any secrets in CPU Buffers. Any memory accesses after VERW execution can still remain in CPU buffers. It is safer to execute VERW late in return to user path to minimize the window in which kernel data can end up in CPU buffers. There are not many kernel secrets to be had after SWITCH_TO_USER_CR3. Add support for deploying VERW mitigation after user register state is restored. This helps minimize the chances of kernel data ending up into CPU buffers after executing VERW. Note that the mitigation at the new location is not yet enabled. Corner case not handled ======================= Interrupts returning to kernel don't clear CPUs buffers since the exit-to-user path is expected to do that anyways. But, there could be a case when an NMI is generated in kernel after the exit-to-user path has cleared the buffers. This case is not handled and NMI returning to kernel don't clear CPU buffers because: 1. It is rare to get an NMI after VERW, but before returning to userspace. 2. For an unprivileged user, there is no known way to make that NMI less rare or target it. 3. It would take a large number of these precisely-timed NMIs to mount an actual attack. There's presumably not enough bandwidth. 4. The NMI in question occurs after a VERW, i.e. when user state is restored and most interesting data is already scrubbed. Whats left is only the data that NMI touches, and that may or may not be of any interest. Suggested-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Pawan Gupta <pawan.kumar.gupta@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/all/20240213-delay-verw-v8-2-a6216d83edb7%40linux.intel.com
2024-02-13 18:21:52 -08:00
CLEAR_CPU_BUFFERS
/*
* RSP now points to an ordinary IRET frame, except that the page
* is read-only and RSP[31:16] are preloaded with the userspace
* values. We can now IRET back to userspace.
*/
jmp native_irq_return_iret
#endif
SYM_CODE_END(common_interrupt_return)
_ASM_NOKPROBE(common_interrupt_return)
x86-64, espfix: Don't leak bits 31:16 of %esp returning to 16-bit stack The IRET instruction, when returning to a 16-bit segment, only restores the bottom 16 bits of the user space stack pointer. This causes some 16-bit software to break, but it also leaks kernel state to user space. We have a software workaround for that ("espfix") for the 32-bit kernel, but it relies on a nonzero stack segment base which is not available in 64-bit mode. In checkin: b3b42ac2cbae x86-64, modify_ldt: Ban 16-bit segments on 64-bit kernels we "solved" this by forbidding 16-bit segments on 64-bit kernels, with the logic that 16-bit support is crippled on 64-bit kernels anyway (no V86 support), but it turns out that people are doing stuff like running old Win16 binaries under Wine and expect it to work. This works around this by creating percpu "ministacks", each of which is mapped 2^16 times 64K apart. When we detect that the return SS is on the LDT, we copy the IRET frame to the ministack and use the relevant alias to return to userspace. The ministacks are mapped readonly, so if IRET faults we promote #GP to #DF which is an IST vector and thus has its own stack; we then do the fixup in the #DF handler. (Making #GP an IST exception would make the msr_safe functions unsafe in NMI/MC context, and quite possibly have other effects.) Special thanks to: - Andy Lutomirski, for the suggestion of using very small stack slots and copy (as opposed to map) the IRET frame there, and for the suggestion to mark them readonly and let the fault promote to #DF. - Konrad Wilk for paravirt fixup and testing. - Borislav Petkov for testing help and useful comments. Reported-by: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/1398816946-3351-1-git-send-email-hpa@linux.intel.com Cc: Konrad Rzeszutek Wilk <konrad.wilk@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Andrew Lutomriski <amluto@gmail.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Dirk Hohndel <dirk@hohndel.org> Cc: Arjan van de Ven <arjan.van.de.ven@intel.com> Cc: comex <comexk@gmail.com> Cc: Alexander van Heukelum <heukelum@fastmail.fm> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: <stable@vger.kernel.org> # consider after upstream merge
2014-04-29 16:46:09 -07:00
/*
* Reload gs selector with exception handling
* di: new selector
*
* Is in entry.text as it shouldn't be instrumented.
*/
SYM_FUNC_START(asm_load_gs_index)
FRAME_BEGIN
swapgs
.Lgs_change:
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR // error_entry
movl %edi, %gs
2: ALTERNATIVE "", "mfence", X86_BUG_SWAPGS_FENCE
swapgs
FRAME_END
RET
/* running with kernelgs */
.Lbad_gs:
swapgs /* switch back to user gs */
.macro ZAP_GS
/* This can't be a string because the preprocessor needs to see it. */
movl $__USER_DS, %eax
movl %eax, %gs
.endm
ALTERNATIVE "", "ZAP_GS", X86_BUG_NULL_SEG
xorl %eax, %eax
movl %eax, %gs
jmp 2b
_ASM_EXTABLE(.Lgs_change, .Lbad_gs)
SYM_FUNC_END(asm_load_gs_index)
EXPORT_SYMBOL(asm_load_gs_index)
#ifdef CONFIG_XEN_PV
/*
* A note on the "critical region" in our callback handler.
* We want to avoid stacking callback handlers due to events occurring
* during handling of the last event. To do this, we keep events disabled
* until we've done all processing. HOWEVER, we must enable events before
* popping the stack frame (can't be done atomically) and so it would still
* be possible to get enough handler activations to overflow the stack.
* Although unlikely, bugs of that kind are hard to track down, so we'd
* like to avoid the possibility.
* So, on entry to the handler we detect whether we interrupted an
* existing activation in its critical region -- if so, we pop the current
* activation and restart the handler using the previous one.
*
* C calling convention: exc_xen_hypervisor_callback(struct *pt_regs)
*/
__FUNC_ALIGN
SYM_CODE_START_LOCAL_NOALIGN(exc_xen_hypervisor_callback)
/*
* Since we don't modify %rdi, evtchn_do_upall(struct *pt_regs) will
* see the correct pointer to the pt_regs
*/
UNWIND_HINT_FUNC
movq %rdi, %rsp /* we don't return, adjust the stack frame */
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
call xen_pv_evtchn_do_upcall
jmp error_return
SYM_CODE_END(exc_xen_hypervisor_callback)
/*
* Hypervisor uses this for application faults while it executes.
* We get here for two reasons:
* 1. Fault while reloading DS, ES, FS or GS
* 2. Fault while executing IRET
* Category 1 we do not need to fix up as Xen has already reloaded all segment
* registers that could be reloaded and zeroed the others.
* Category 2 we fix up by killing the current process. We cannot use the
* normal Linux return path in this case because if we use the IRET hypercall
* to pop the stack frame we end up in an infinite loop of failsafe callbacks.
* We distinguish between categories by comparing each saved segment register
* with its current contents: any discrepancy means we in category 1.
*/
__FUNC_ALIGN
SYM_CODE_START_NOALIGN(xen_failsafe_callback)
UNWIND_HINT_UNDEFINED
ENDBR
movl %ds, %ecx
cmpw %cx, 0x10(%rsp)
jne 1f
movl %es, %ecx
cmpw %cx, 0x18(%rsp)
jne 1f
movl %fs, %ecx
cmpw %cx, 0x20(%rsp)
jne 1f
movl %gs, %ecx
cmpw %cx, 0x28(%rsp)
jne 1f
/* All segments match their saved values => Category 2 (Bad IRET). */
movq (%rsp), %rcx
movq 8(%rsp), %r11
addq $0x30, %rsp
pushq $0 /* RIP */
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS offset=8
jmp asm_exc_general_protection
1: /* Segment mismatch => Category 1 (Bad segment). Retry the IRET. */
movq (%rsp), %rcx
movq 8(%rsp), %r11
addq $0x30, %rsp
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS
pushq $-1 /* orig_ax = -1 => not a system call */
PUSH_AND_CLEAR_REGS
x86/entry/unwind: Create stack frames for saved interrupt registers With frame pointers, when a task is interrupted, its stack is no longer completely reliable because the function could have been interrupted before it had a chance to save the previous frame pointer on the stack. So the caller of the interrupted function could get skipped by a stack trace. This is problematic for live patching, which needs to know whether a stack trace of a sleeping task can be relied upon. There's currently no way to detect if a sleeping task was interrupted by a page fault exception or preemption before it went to sleep. Another issue is that when dumping the stack of an interrupted task, the unwinder has no way of knowing where the saved pt_regs registers are, so it can't print them. This solves those issues by encoding the pt_regs pointer in the frame pointer on entry from an interrupt or an exception. This patch also updates the unwinder to be able to decode it, because otherwise the unwinder would be broken by this change. Note that this causes a change in the behavior of the unwinder: each instance of a pt_regs on the stack is now considered a "frame". So callers of unwind_get_return_address() will now get an occasional 'regs->ip' address that would have previously been skipped over. Suggested-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/8b9f84a21e39d249049e0547b559ff8da0df0988.1476973742.git.jpoimboe@redhat.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2016-10-20 11:34:40 -05:00
ENCODE_FRAME_POINTER
jmp error_return
SYM_CODE_END(xen_failsafe_callback)
#endif /* CONFIG_XEN_PV */
/*
* Save all registers in pt_regs. Return GSBASE related information
* in EBX depending on the availability of the FSGSBASE instructions:
*
* FSGSBASE R/EBX
* N 0 -> SWAPGS on exit
* 1 -> no SWAPGS on exit
*
* Y GSBASE value at entry, must be restored in paranoid_exit
*
* R14 - old CR3
* R15 - old SPEC_CTRL
*/
SYM_CODE_START(paranoid_entry)
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR
UNWIND_HINT_FUNC
PUSH_AND_CLEAR_REGS save_ret=1
ENCODE_FRAME_POINTER 8
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
/*
* Always stash CR3 in %r14. This value will be restored,
* verbatim, at exit. Needed if paranoid_entry interrupted
* another entry that already switched to the user CR3 value
* but has not yet returned to userspace.
*
* This is also why CS (stashed in the "iret frame" by the
* hardware at entry) can not be used: this may be a return
* to kernel code, but with a user CR3 value.
*
* Switching CR3 does not depend on kernel GSBASE so it can
* be done before switching to the kernel GSBASE. This is
* required for FSGSBASE because the kernel GSBASE has to
* be retrieved from a kernel internal table.
*/
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
SAVE_AND_SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3 scratch_reg=%rax save_reg=%r14
/*
* Handling GSBASE depends on the availability of FSGSBASE.
*
* Without FSGSBASE the kernel enforces that negative GSBASE
* values indicate kernel GSBASE. With FSGSBASE no assumptions
* can be made about the GSBASE value when entering from user
* space.
*/
ALTERNATIVE "jmp .Lparanoid_entry_checkgs", "", X86_FEATURE_FSGSBASE
/*
* Read the current GSBASE and store it in %rbx unconditionally,
* retrieve and set the current CPUs kernel GSBASE. The stored value
* has to be restored in paranoid_exit unconditionally.
*
* The unconditional write to GS base below ensures that no subsequent
* loads based on a mispredicted GS base can happen, therefore no LFENCE
* is needed here.
*/
SAVE_AND_SET_GSBASE scratch_reg=%rax save_reg=%rbx
jmp .Lparanoid_gsbase_done
.Lparanoid_entry_checkgs:
/* EBX = 1 -> kernel GSBASE active, no restore required */
movl $1, %ebx
/*
* The kernel-enforced convention is a negative GSBASE indicates
* a kernel value. No SWAPGS needed on entry and exit.
*/
movl $MSR_GS_BASE, %ecx
rdmsr
testl %edx, %edx
js .Lparanoid_kernel_gsbase
/* EBX = 0 -> SWAPGS required on exit */
xorl %ebx, %ebx
swapgs
.Lparanoid_kernel_gsbase:
x86/speculation: Prepare entry code for Spectre v1 swapgs mitigations Spectre v1 isn't only about array bounds checks. It can affect any conditional checks. The kernel entry code interrupt, exception, and NMI handlers all have conditional swapgs checks. Those may be problematic in the context of Spectre v1, as kernel code can speculatively run with a user GS. For example: if (coming from user space) swapgs mov %gs:<percpu_offset>, %reg mov (%reg), %reg1 When coming from user space, the CPU can speculatively skip the swapgs, and then do a speculative percpu load using the user GS value. So the user can speculatively force a read of any kernel value. If a gadget exists which uses the percpu value as an address in another load/store, then the contents of the kernel value may become visible via an L1 side channel attack. A similar attack exists when coming from kernel space. The CPU can speculatively do the swapgs, causing the user GS to get used for the rest of the speculative window. The mitigation is similar to a traditional Spectre v1 mitigation, except: a) index masking isn't possible; because the index (percpu offset) isn't user-controlled; and b) an lfence is needed in both the "from user" swapgs path and the "from kernel" non-swapgs path (because of the two attacks described above). The user entry swapgs paths already have SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3, which has a CR3 write when PTI is enabled. Since CR3 writes are serializing, the lfences can be skipped in those cases. On the other hand, the kernel entry swapgs paths don't depend on PTI. To avoid unnecessary lfences for the user entry case, create two separate features for alternative patching: X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_USER X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_KERNEL Use these features in entry code to patch in lfences where needed. The features aren't enabled yet, so there's no functional change. Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com>
2019-07-08 11:52:25 -05:00
FENCE_SWAPGS_KERNEL_ENTRY
.Lparanoid_gsbase_done:
/*
* Once we have CR3 and %GS setup save and set SPEC_CTRL. Just like
* CR3 above, keep the old value in a callee saved register.
*/
IBRS_ENTER save_reg=%r15
x86/retbleed: Add SKL return thunk To address the Intel SKL RSB underflow issue in software it's required to do call depth tracking. Provide a return thunk for call depth tracking on Intel SKL CPUs. The tracking does not use a counter. It uses uses arithmetic shift right on call entry and logical shift left on return. The depth tracking variable is initialized to 0x8000.... when the call depth is zero. The arithmetic shift right sign extends the MSB and saturates after the 12th call. The shift count is 5 so the tracking covers 12 nested calls. On return the variable is shifted left logically so it becomes zero again. CALL RET 0: 0x8000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 1: 0xfc00000000000000 0xf000000000000000 ... 11: 0xfffffffffffffff8 0xfffffffffffffc00 12: 0xffffffffffffffff 0xffffffffffffffe0 After a return buffer fill the depth is credited 12 calls before the next stuffing has to take place. There is a inaccuracy for situations like this: 10 calls 5 returns 3 calls 4 returns 3 calls .... The shift count might cause this to be off by one in either direction, but there is still a cushion vs. the RSB depth. The algorithm does not claim to be perfect, but it should obfuscate the problem enough to make exploitation extremly difficult. The theory behind this is: RSB is a stack with depth 16 which is filled on every call. On the return path speculation "pops" entries to speculate down the call chain. Once the speculative RSB is empty it switches to other predictors, e.g. the Branch History Buffer, which can be mistrained by user space and misguide the speculation path to a gadget. Call depth tracking is designed to break this speculation path by stuffing speculation trap calls into the RSB which are never getting a corresponding return executed. This stalls the prediction path until it gets resteered, The assumption is that stuffing at the 12th return is sufficient to break the speculation before it hits the underflow and the fallback to the other predictors. Testing confirms that it works. Johannes, one of the retbleed researchers. tried to attack this approach but failed. There is obviously no scientific proof that this will withstand future research progress, but all we can do right now is to speculate about it. The SAR/SHL usage was suggested by Andi Kleen. Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/20220915111147.890071690@infradead.org
2022-09-15 13:11:27 +02:00
UNTRAIN_RET_FROM_CALL
RET
SYM_CODE_END(paranoid_entry)
/*
* "Paranoid" exit path from exception stack. This is invoked
* only on return from non-NMI IST interrupts that came
* from kernel space.
*
* We may be returning to very strange contexts (e.g. very early
* in syscall entry), so checking for preemption here would
* be complicated. Fortunately, there's no good reason to try
* to handle preemption here.
*
* R/EBX contains the GSBASE related information depending on the
* availability of the FSGSBASE instructions:
*
* FSGSBASE R/EBX
* N 0 -> SWAPGS on exit
* 1 -> no SWAPGS on exit
*
* Y User space GSBASE, must be restored unconditionally
*
* R14 - old CR3
* R15 - old SPEC_CTRL
*/
SYM_CODE_START_LOCAL(paranoid_exit)
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
/*
* Must restore IBRS state before both CR3 and %GS since we need access
* to the per-CPU x86_spec_ctrl_shadow variable.
*/
IBRS_EXIT save_reg=%r15
/*
* The order of operations is important. PARANOID_RESTORE_CR3 requires
* kernel GSBASE.
*
* NB to anyone to try to optimize this code: this code does
* not execute at all for exceptions from user mode. Those
* exceptions go through error_return instead.
*/
PARANOID_RESTORE_CR3 scratch_reg=%rax save_reg=%r14
/* Handle the three GSBASE cases */
ALTERNATIVE "jmp .Lparanoid_exit_checkgs", "", X86_FEATURE_FSGSBASE
/* With FSGSBASE enabled, unconditionally restore GSBASE */
wrgsbase %rbx
jmp restore_regs_and_return_to_kernel
.Lparanoid_exit_checkgs:
/* On non-FSGSBASE systems, conditionally do SWAPGS */
testl %ebx, %ebx
jnz restore_regs_and_return_to_kernel
/* We are returning to a context with user GSBASE */
swapgs
jmp restore_regs_and_return_to_kernel
SYM_CODE_END(paranoid_exit)
/*
* Switch GS and CR3 if needed.
*/
SYM_CODE_START(error_entry)
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR
UNWIND_HINT_FUNC
PUSH_AND_CLEAR_REGS save_ret=1
ENCODE_FRAME_POINTER 8
testb $3, CS+8(%rsp)
jz .Lerror_kernelspace
/*
* We entered from user mode or we're pretending to have entered
* from user mode due to an IRET fault.
*/
swapgs
x86/speculation: Prepare entry code for Spectre v1 swapgs mitigations Spectre v1 isn't only about array bounds checks. It can affect any conditional checks. The kernel entry code interrupt, exception, and NMI handlers all have conditional swapgs checks. Those may be problematic in the context of Spectre v1, as kernel code can speculatively run with a user GS. For example: if (coming from user space) swapgs mov %gs:<percpu_offset>, %reg mov (%reg), %reg1 When coming from user space, the CPU can speculatively skip the swapgs, and then do a speculative percpu load using the user GS value. So the user can speculatively force a read of any kernel value. If a gadget exists which uses the percpu value as an address in another load/store, then the contents of the kernel value may become visible via an L1 side channel attack. A similar attack exists when coming from kernel space. The CPU can speculatively do the swapgs, causing the user GS to get used for the rest of the speculative window. The mitigation is similar to a traditional Spectre v1 mitigation, except: a) index masking isn't possible; because the index (percpu offset) isn't user-controlled; and b) an lfence is needed in both the "from user" swapgs path and the "from kernel" non-swapgs path (because of the two attacks described above). The user entry swapgs paths already have SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3, which has a CR3 write when PTI is enabled. Since CR3 writes are serializing, the lfences can be skipped in those cases. On the other hand, the kernel entry swapgs paths don't depend on PTI. To avoid unnecessary lfences for the user entry case, create two separate features for alternative patching: X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_USER X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_KERNEL Use these features in entry code to patch in lfences where needed. The features aren't enabled yet, so there's no functional change. Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com>
2019-07-08 11:52:25 -05:00
FENCE_SWAPGS_USER_ENTRY
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
/* We have user CR3. Change to kernel CR3. */
SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3 scratch_reg=%rax
IBRS_ENTER
x86/retbleed: Add SKL return thunk To address the Intel SKL RSB underflow issue in software it's required to do call depth tracking. Provide a return thunk for call depth tracking on Intel SKL CPUs. The tracking does not use a counter. It uses uses arithmetic shift right on call entry and logical shift left on return. The depth tracking variable is initialized to 0x8000.... when the call depth is zero. The arithmetic shift right sign extends the MSB and saturates after the 12th call. The shift count is 5 so the tracking covers 12 nested calls. On return the variable is shifted left logically so it becomes zero again. CALL RET 0: 0x8000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 1: 0xfc00000000000000 0xf000000000000000 ... 11: 0xfffffffffffffff8 0xfffffffffffffc00 12: 0xffffffffffffffff 0xffffffffffffffe0 After a return buffer fill the depth is credited 12 calls before the next stuffing has to take place. There is a inaccuracy for situations like this: 10 calls 5 returns 3 calls 4 returns 3 calls .... The shift count might cause this to be off by one in either direction, but there is still a cushion vs. the RSB depth. The algorithm does not claim to be perfect, but it should obfuscate the problem enough to make exploitation extremly difficult. The theory behind this is: RSB is a stack with depth 16 which is filled on every call. On the return path speculation "pops" entries to speculate down the call chain. Once the speculative RSB is empty it switches to other predictors, e.g. the Branch History Buffer, which can be mistrained by user space and misguide the speculation path to a gadget. Call depth tracking is designed to break this speculation path by stuffing speculation trap calls into the RSB which are never getting a corresponding return executed. This stalls the prediction path until it gets resteered, The assumption is that stuffing at the 12th return is sufficient to break the speculation before it hits the underflow and the fallback to the other predictors. Testing confirms that it works. Johannes, one of the retbleed researchers. tried to attack this approach but failed. There is obviously no scientific proof that this will withstand future research progress, but all we can do right now is to speculate about it. The SAR/SHL usage was suggested by Andi Kleen. Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/20220915111147.890071690@infradead.org
2022-09-15 13:11:27 +02:00
UNTRAIN_RET_FROM_CALL
leaq 8(%rsp), %rdi /* arg0 = pt_regs pointer */
x86/entry/64: Use a per-CPU trampoline stack for IDT entries Historically, IDT entries from usermode have always gone directly to the running task's kernel stack. Rearrange it so that we enter on a per-CPU trampoline stack and then manually switch to the task's stack. This touches a couple of extra cachelines, but it gives us a chance to run some code before we touch the kernel stack. The asm isn't exactly beautiful, but I think that fully refactoring it can wait. Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bpetkov@suse.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Rik van Riel <riel@redhat.com> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20171204150606.225330557@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:23 +01:00
/* Put us onto the real thread stack. */
jmp sync_regs
/*
* There are two places in the kernel that can potentially fault with
* usergs. Handle them here. B stepping K8s sometimes report a
* truncated RIP for IRET exceptions returning to compat mode. Check
* for these here too.
*/
.Lerror_kernelspace:
leaq native_irq_return_iret(%rip), %rcx
cmpq %rcx, RIP+8(%rsp)
je .Lerror_bad_iret
movl %ecx, %eax /* zero extend */
cmpq %rax, RIP+8(%rsp)
je .Lbstep_iret
cmpq $.Lgs_change, RIP+8(%rsp)
x86/speculation: Prepare entry code for Spectre v1 swapgs mitigations Spectre v1 isn't only about array bounds checks. It can affect any conditional checks. The kernel entry code interrupt, exception, and NMI handlers all have conditional swapgs checks. Those may be problematic in the context of Spectre v1, as kernel code can speculatively run with a user GS. For example: if (coming from user space) swapgs mov %gs:<percpu_offset>, %reg mov (%reg), %reg1 When coming from user space, the CPU can speculatively skip the swapgs, and then do a speculative percpu load using the user GS value. So the user can speculatively force a read of any kernel value. If a gadget exists which uses the percpu value as an address in another load/store, then the contents of the kernel value may become visible via an L1 side channel attack. A similar attack exists when coming from kernel space. The CPU can speculatively do the swapgs, causing the user GS to get used for the rest of the speculative window. The mitigation is similar to a traditional Spectre v1 mitigation, except: a) index masking isn't possible; because the index (percpu offset) isn't user-controlled; and b) an lfence is needed in both the "from user" swapgs path and the "from kernel" non-swapgs path (because of the two attacks described above). The user entry swapgs paths already have SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3, which has a CR3 write when PTI is enabled. Since CR3 writes are serializing, the lfences can be skipped in those cases. On the other hand, the kernel entry swapgs paths don't depend on PTI. To avoid unnecessary lfences for the user entry case, create two separate features for alternative patching: X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_USER X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_KERNEL Use these features in entry code to patch in lfences where needed. The features aren't enabled yet, so there's no functional change. Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com>
2019-07-08 11:52:25 -05:00
jne .Lerror_entry_done_lfence
/*
* hack: .Lgs_change can fail with user gsbase. If this happens, fix up
* gsbase and proceed. We'll fix up the exception and land in
* .Lgs_change's error handler with kernel gsbase.
*/
swapgs
/*
* Issue an LFENCE to prevent GS speculation, regardless of whether it is a
* kernel or user gsbase.
*/
.Lerror_entry_done_lfence:
FENCE_SWAPGS_KERNEL_ENTRY
x86/retbleed: Add SKL return thunk To address the Intel SKL RSB underflow issue in software it's required to do call depth tracking. Provide a return thunk for call depth tracking on Intel SKL CPUs. The tracking does not use a counter. It uses uses arithmetic shift right on call entry and logical shift left on return. The depth tracking variable is initialized to 0x8000.... when the call depth is zero. The arithmetic shift right sign extends the MSB and saturates after the 12th call. The shift count is 5 so the tracking covers 12 nested calls. On return the variable is shifted left logically so it becomes zero again. CALL RET 0: 0x8000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 1: 0xfc00000000000000 0xf000000000000000 ... 11: 0xfffffffffffffff8 0xfffffffffffffc00 12: 0xffffffffffffffff 0xffffffffffffffe0 After a return buffer fill the depth is credited 12 calls before the next stuffing has to take place. There is a inaccuracy for situations like this: 10 calls 5 returns 3 calls 4 returns 3 calls .... The shift count might cause this to be off by one in either direction, but there is still a cushion vs. the RSB depth. The algorithm does not claim to be perfect, but it should obfuscate the problem enough to make exploitation extremly difficult. The theory behind this is: RSB is a stack with depth 16 which is filled on every call. On the return path speculation "pops" entries to speculate down the call chain. Once the speculative RSB is empty it switches to other predictors, e.g. the Branch History Buffer, which can be mistrained by user space and misguide the speculation path to a gadget. Call depth tracking is designed to break this speculation path by stuffing speculation trap calls into the RSB which are never getting a corresponding return executed. This stalls the prediction path until it gets resteered, The assumption is that stuffing at the 12th return is sufficient to break the speculation before it hits the underflow and the fallback to the other predictors. Testing confirms that it works. Johannes, one of the retbleed researchers. tried to attack this approach but failed. There is obviously no scientific proof that this will withstand future research progress, but all we can do right now is to speculate about it. The SAR/SHL usage was suggested by Andi Kleen. Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/20220915111147.890071690@infradead.org
2022-09-15 13:11:27 +02:00
CALL_DEPTH_ACCOUNT
leaq 8(%rsp), %rax /* return pt_regs pointer */
VALIDATE_UNRET_END
RET
.Lbstep_iret:
/* Fix truncated RIP */
movq %rcx, RIP+8(%rsp)
/* fall through */
.Lerror_bad_iret:
/*
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
* We came from an IRET to user mode, so we have user
* gsbase and CR3. Switch to kernel gsbase and CR3:
*/
swapgs
x86/speculation: Prepare entry code for Spectre v1 swapgs mitigations Spectre v1 isn't only about array bounds checks. It can affect any conditional checks. The kernel entry code interrupt, exception, and NMI handlers all have conditional swapgs checks. Those may be problematic in the context of Spectre v1, as kernel code can speculatively run with a user GS. For example: if (coming from user space) swapgs mov %gs:<percpu_offset>, %reg mov (%reg), %reg1 When coming from user space, the CPU can speculatively skip the swapgs, and then do a speculative percpu load using the user GS value. So the user can speculatively force a read of any kernel value. If a gadget exists which uses the percpu value as an address in another load/store, then the contents of the kernel value may become visible via an L1 side channel attack. A similar attack exists when coming from kernel space. The CPU can speculatively do the swapgs, causing the user GS to get used for the rest of the speculative window. The mitigation is similar to a traditional Spectre v1 mitigation, except: a) index masking isn't possible; because the index (percpu offset) isn't user-controlled; and b) an lfence is needed in both the "from user" swapgs path and the "from kernel" non-swapgs path (because of the two attacks described above). The user entry swapgs paths already have SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3, which has a CR3 write when PTI is enabled. Since CR3 writes are serializing, the lfences can be skipped in those cases. On the other hand, the kernel entry swapgs paths don't depend on PTI. To avoid unnecessary lfences for the user entry case, create two separate features for alternative patching: X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_USER X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_KERNEL Use these features in entry code to patch in lfences where needed. The features aren't enabled yet, so there's no functional change. Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com>
2019-07-08 11:52:25 -05:00
FENCE_SWAPGS_USER_ENTRY
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3 scratch_reg=%rax
IBRS_ENTER
x86/retbleed: Add SKL return thunk To address the Intel SKL RSB underflow issue in software it's required to do call depth tracking. Provide a return thunk for call depth tracking on Intel SKL CPUs. The tracking does not use a counter. It uses uses arithmetic shift right on call entry and logical shift left on return. The depth tracking variable is initialized to 0x8000.... when the call depth is zero. The arithmetic shift right sign extends the MSB and saturates after the 12th call. The shift count is 5 so the tracking covers 12 nested calls. On return the variable is shifted left logically so it becomes zero again. CALL RET 0: 0x8000000000000000 0x0000000000000000 1: 0xfc00000000000000 0xf000000000000000 ... 11: 0xfffffffffffffff8 0xfffffffffffffc00 12: 0xffffffffffffffff 0xffffffffffffffe0 After a return buffer fill the depth is credited 12 calls before the next stuffing has to take place. There is a inaccuracy for situations like this: 10 calls 5 returns 3 calls 4 returns 3 calls .... The shift count might cause this to be off by one in either direction, but there is still a cushion vs. the RSB depth. The algorithm does not claim to be perfect, but it should obfuscate the problem enough to make exploitation extremly difficult. The theory behind this is: RSB is a stack with depth 16 which is filled on every call. On the return path speculation "pops" entries to speculate down the call chain. Once the speculative RSB is empty it switches to other predictors, e.g. the Branch History Buffer, which can be mistrained by user space and misguide the speculation path to a gadget. Call depth tracking is designed to break this speculation path by stuffing speculation trap calls into the RSB which are never getting a corresponding return executed. This stalls the prediction path until it gets resteered, The assumption is that stuffing at the 12th return is sufficient to break the speculation before it hits the underflow and the fallback to the other predictors. Testing confirms that it works. Johannes, one of the retbleed researchers. tried to attack this approach but failed. There is obviously no scientific proof that this will withstand future research progress, but all we can do right now is to speculate about it. The SAR/SHL usage was suggested by Andi Kleen. Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Signed-off-by: Peter Zijlstra (Intel) <peterz@infradead.org> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/r/20220915111147.890071690@infradead.org
2022-09-15 13:11:27 +02:00
UNTRAIN_RET_FROM_CALL
/*
* Pretend that the exception came from user mode: set up pt_regs
x86/entry/64: Remove %ebx handling from error_entry/exit error_entry and error_exit communicate the user vs. kernel status of the frame using %ebx. This is unnecessary -- the information is in regs->cs. Just use regs->cs. This makes error_entry simpler and makes error_exit more robust. It also fixes a nasty bug. Before all the Spectre nonsense, the xen_failsafe_callback entry point returned like this: ALLOC_PT_GPREGS_ON_STACK SAVE_C_REGS SAVE_EXTRA_REGS ENCODE_FRAME_POINTER jmp error_exit And it did not go through error_entry. This was bogus: RBX contained garbage, and error_exit expected a flag in RBX. Fortunately, it generally contained *nonzero* garbage, so the correct code path was used. As part of the Spectre fixes, code was added to clear RBX to mitigate certain speculation attacks. Now, depending on kernel configuration, RBX got zeroed and, when running some Wine workloads, the kernel crashes. This was introduced by: commit 3ac6d8c787b8 ("x86/entry/64: Clear registers for exceptions/interrupts, to reduce speculation attack surface") With this patch applied, RBX is no longer needed as a flag, and the problem goes away. I suspect that malicious userspace could use this bug to crash the kernel even without the offending patch applied, though. [ Historical note: I wrote this patch as a cleanup before I was aware of the bug it fixed. ] [ Note to stable maintainers: this should probably get applied to all kernels. If you're nervous about that, a more conservative fix to add xorl %ebx,%ebx; incl %ebx before the jump to error_exit should also fix the problem. ] Reported-and-tested-by: M. Vefa Bicakci <m.v.b@runbox.com> Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org Cc: xen-devel@lists.xenproject.org Fixes: 3ac6d8c787b8 ("x86/entry/64: Clear registers for exceptions/interrupts, to reduce speculation attack surface") Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/b5010a090d3586b2d6e06c7ad3ec5542d1241c45.1532282627.git.luto@kernel.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2018-07-22 11:05:09 -07:00
* as if we faulted immediately after IRET.
*/
leaq 8(%rsp), %rdi /* arg0 = pt_regs pointer */
call fixup_bad_iret
mov %rax, %rdi
jmp sync_regs
SYM_CODE_END(error_entry)
SYM_CODE_START_LOCAL(error_return)
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
DEBUG_ENTRY_ASSERT_IRQS_OFF
testb $3, CS(%rsp)
jz restore_regs_and_return_to_kernel
jmp swapgs_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode
SYM_CODE_END(error_return)
/*
* Runs on exception stack. Xen PV does not go through this path at all,
* so we can use real assembly here.
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
*
* Registers:
* %r14: Used to save/restore the CR3 of the interrupted context
* when MITIGATION_PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION is in use. Do not clobber.
*/
SYM_CODE_START(asm_exc_nmi)
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_ENTRY
ENDBR
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
/*
* We allow breakpoints in NMIs. If a breakpoint occurs, then
* the iretq it performs will take us out of NMI context.
* This means that we can have nested NMIs where the next
* NMI is using the top of the stack of the previous NMI. We
* can't let it execute because the nested NMI will corrupt the
* stack of the previous NMI. NMI handlers are not re-entrant
* anyway.
*
* To handle this case we do the following:
* Check a special location on the stack that contains a
* variable that is set when NMIs are executing.
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
* The interrupted task's stack is also checked to see if it
* is an NMI stack.
* If the variable is not set and the stack is not the NMI
* stack then:
* o Set the special variable on the stack
* o Copy the interrupt frame into an "outermost" location on the
* stack
* o Copy the interrupt frame into an "iret" location on the stack
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
* o Continue processing the NMI
* If the variable is set or the previous stack is the NMI stack:
* o Modify the "iret" location to jump to the repeat_nmi
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
* o return back to the first NMI
*
* Now on exit of the first NMI, we first clear the stack variable
* The NMI stack will tell any nested NMIs at that point that it is
* nested. Then we pop the stack normally with iret, and if there was
* a nested NMI that updated the copy interrupt stack frame, a
* jump will be made to the repeat_nmi code that will handle the second
* NMI.
*
* However, espfix prevents us from directly returning to userspace
* with a single IRET instruction. Similarly, IRET to user mode
* can fault. We therefore handle NMIs from user space like
* other IST entries.
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
*/
ASM_CLAC
cld
/* Use %rdx as our temp variable throughout */
pushq %rdx
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
testb $3, CS-RIP+8(%rsp)
jz .Lnmi_from_kernel
/*
* NMI from user mode. We need to run on the thread stack, but we
* can't go through the normal entry paths: NMIs are masked, and
* we don't want to enable interrupts, because then we'll end
* up in an awkward situation in which IRQs are on but NMIs
* are off.
*
* We also must not push anything to the stack before switching
* stacks lest we corrupt the "NMI executing" variable.
*/
swapgs
x86/speculation: Prepare entry code for Spectre v1 swapgs mitigations Spectre v1 isn't only about array bounds checks. It can affect any conditional checks. The kernel entry code interrupt, exception, and NMI handlers all have conditional swapgs checks. Those may be problematic in the context of Spectre v1, as kernel code can speculatively run with a user GS. For example: if (coming from user space) swapgs mov %gs:<percpu_offset>, %reg mov (%reg), %reg1 When coming from user space, the CPU can speculatively skip the swapgs, and then do a speculative percpu load using the user GS value. So the user can speculatively force a read of any kernel value. If a gadget exists which uses the percpu value as an address in another load/store, then the contents of the kernel value may become visible via an L1 side channel attack. A similar attack exists when coming from kernel space. The CPU can speculatively do the swapgs, causing the user GS to get used for the rest of the speculative window. The mitigation is similar to a traditional Spectre v1 mitigation, except: a) index masking isn't possible; because the index (percpu offset) isn't user-controlled; and b) an lfence is needed in both the "from user" swapgs path and the "from kernel" non-swapgs path (because of the two attacks described above). The user entry swapgs paths already have SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3, which has a CR3 write when PTI is enabled. Since CR3 writes are serializing, the lfences can be skipped in those cases. On the other hand, the kernel entry swapgs paths don't depend on PTI. To avoid unnecessary lfences for the user entry case, create two separate features for alternative patching: X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_USER X86_FEATURE_FENCE_SWAPGS_KERNEL Use these features in entry code to patch in lfences where needed. The features aren't enabled yet, so there's no functional change. Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com>
2019-07-08 11:52:25 -05:00
FENCE_SWAPGS_USER_ENTRY
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
SWITCH_TO_KERNEL_CR3 scratch_reg=%rdx
movq %rsp, %rdx
movq PER_CPU_VAR(pcpu_hot + X86_top_of_stack), %rsp
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS base=%rdx offset=8
pushq 5*8(%rdx) /* pt_regs->ss */
pushq 4*8(%rdx) /* pt_regs->rsp */
pushq 3*8(%rdx) /* pt_regs->flags */
pushq 2*8(%rdx) /* pt_regs->cs */
pushq 1*8(%rdx) /* pt_regs->rip */
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS
pushq $-1 /* pt_regs->orig_ax */
PUSH_AND_CLEAR_REGS rdx=(%rdx)
x86/entry/unwind: Create stack frames for saved interrupt registers With frame pointers, when a task is interrupted, its stack is no longer completely reliable because the function could have been interrupted before it had a chance to save the previous frame pointer on the stack. So the caller of the interrupted function could get skipped by a stack trace. This is problematic for live patching, which needs to know whether a stack trace of a sleeping task can be relied upon. There's currently no way to detect if a sleeping task was interrupted by a page fault exception or preemption before it went to sleep. Another issue is that when dumping the stack of an interrupted task, the unwinder has no way of knowing where the saved pt_regs registers are, so it can't print them. This solves those issues by encoding the pt_regs pointer in the frame pointer on entry from an interrupt or an exception. This patch also updates the unwinder to be able to decode it, because otherwise the unwinder would be broken by this change. Note that this causes a change in the behavior of the unwinder: each instance of a pt_regs on the stack is now considered a "frame". So callers of unwind_get_return_address() will now get an occasional 'regs->ip' address that would have previously been skipped over. Suggested-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/8b9f84a21e39d249049e0547b559ff8da0df0988.1476973742.git.jpoimboe@redhat.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2016-10-20 11:34:40 -05:00
ENCODE_FRAME_POINTER
IBRS_ENTER
UNTRAIN_RET
/*
* At this point we no longer need to worry about stack damage
* due to nesting -- we're on the normal thread stack and we're
* done with the NMI stack.
*/
movq %rsp, %rdi
call exc_nmi
/*
* Return back to user mode. We must *not* do the normal exit
x86/entry/unwind: Create stack frames for saved interrupt registers With frame pointers, when a task is interrupted, its stack is no longer completely reliable because the function could have been interrupted before it had a chance to save the previous frame pointer on the stack. So the caller of the interrupted function could get skipped by a stack trace. This is problematic for live patching, which needs to know whether a stack trace of a sleeping task can be relied upon. There's currently no way to detect if a sleeping task was interrupted by a page fault exception or preemption before it went to sleep. Another issue is that when dumping the stack of an interrupted task, the unwinder has no way of knowing where the saved pt_regs registers are, so it can't print them. This solves those issues by encoding the pt_regs pointer in the frame pointer on entry from an interrupt or an exception. This patch also updates the unwinder to be able to decode it, because otherwise the unwinder would be broken by this change. Note that this causes a change in the behavior of the unwinder: each instance of a pt_regs on the stack is now considered a "frame". So callers of unwind_get_return_address() will now get an occasional 'regs->ip' address that would have previously been skipped over. Suggested-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Signed-off-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/8b9f84a21e39d249049e0547b559ff8da0df0988.1476973742.git.jpoimboe@redhat.com Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2016-10-20 11:34:40 -05:00
* work, because we don't want to enable interrupts.
*/
jmp swapgs_restore_regs_and_return_to_usermode
.Lnmi_from_kernel:
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
/*
* Here's what our stack frame will look like:
* +---------------------------------------------------------+
* | original SS |
* | original Return RSP |
* | original RFLAGS |
* | original CS |
* | original RIP |
* +---------------------------------------------------------+
* | temp storage for rdx |
* +---------------------------------------------------------+
* | "NMI executing" variable |
* +---------------------------------------------------------+
* | iret SS } Copied from "outermost" frame |
* | iret Return RSP } on each loop iteration; overwritten |
* | iret RFLAGS } by a nested NMI to force another |
* | iret CS } iteration if needed. |
* | iret RIP } |
* +---------------------------------------------------------+
* | outermost SS } initialized in first_nmi; |
* | outermost Return RSP } will not be changed before |
* | outermost RFLAGS } NMI processing is done. |
* | outermost CS } Copied to "iret" frame on each |
* | outermost RIP } iteration. |
* +---------------------------------------------------------+
* | pt_regs |
* +---------------------------------------------------------+
*
* The "original" frame is used by hardware. Before re-enabling
* NMIs, we need to be done with it, and we need to leave enough
* space for the asm code here.
*
* We return by executing IRET while RSP points to the "iret" frame.
* That will either return for real or it will loop back into NMI
* processing.
*
* The "outermost" frame is copied to the "iret" frame on each
* iteration of the loop, so each iteration starts with the "iret"
* frame pointing to the final return target.
*/
/*
* Determine whether we're a nested NMI.
*
* If we interrupted kernel code between repeat_nmi and
* end_repeat_nmi, then we are a nested NMI. We must not
* modify the "iret" frame because it's being written by
* the outer NMI. That's okay; the outer NMI handler is
* about to call exc_nmi() anyway, so we can just resume
* the outer NMI.
*/
movq $repeat_nmi, %rdx
cmpq 8(%rsp), %rdx
ja 1f
movq $end_repeat_nmi, %rdx
cmpq 8(%rsp), %rdx
ja nested_nmi_out
1:
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
/*
* Now check "NMI executing". If it's set, then we're nested.
* This will not detect if we interrupted an outer NMI just
* before IRET.
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
*/
cmpl $1, -8(%rsp)
je nested_nmi
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
/*
* Now test if the previous stack was an NMI stack. This covers
* the case where we interrupt an outer NMI after it clears
* "NMI executing" but before IRET. We need to be careful, though:
* there is one case in which RSP could point to the NMI stack
* despite there being no NMI active: naughty userspace controls
* RSP at the very beginning of the SYSCALL targets. We can
* pull a fast one on naughty userspace, though: we program
* SYSCALL to mask DF, so userspace cannot cause DF to be set
* if it controls the kernel's RSP. We set DF before we clear
* "NMI executing".
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
*/
lea 6*8(%rsp), %rdx
/* Compare the NMI stack (rdx) with the stack we came from (4*8(%rsp)) */
cmpq %rdx, 4*8(%rsp)
/* If the stack pointer is above the NMI stack, this is a normal NMI */
ja first_nmi
subq $EXCEPTION_STKSZ, %rdx
cmpq %rdx, 4*8(%rsp)
/* If it is below the NMI stack, it is a normal NMI */
jb first_nmi
/* Ah, it is within the NMI stack. */
testb $(X86_EFLAGS_DF >> 8), (3*8 + 1)(%rsp)
jz first_nmi /* RSP was user controlled. */
/* This is a nested NMI. */
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
nested_nmi:
/*
* Modify the "iret" frame to point to repeat_nmi, forcing another
* iteration of NMI handling.
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
*/
subq $8, %rsp
leaq -10*8(%rsp), %rdx
pushq $__KERNEL_DS
pushq %rdx
x86/debug: Remove perpetually broken, unmaintainable dwarf annotations So the dwarf2 annotations in low level assembly code have become an increasing hindrance: unreadable, messy macros mixed into some of the most security sensitive code paths of the Linux kernel. These debug info annotations don't even buy the upstream kernel anything: dwarf driven stack unwinding has caused problems in the past so it's out of tree, and the upstream kernel only uses the much more robust framepointers based stack unwinding method. In addition to that there's a steady, slow bitrot going on with these annotations, requiring frequent fixups. There's no tooling and no functionality upstream that keeps it correct. So burn down the sick forest, allowing new, healthier growth: 27 files changed, 350 insertions(+), 1101 deletions(-) Someone who has the willingness and time to do this properly can attempt to reintroduce dwarf debuginfo in x86 assembly code plus dwarf unwinding from first principles, with the following conditions: - it should be maximally readable, and maximally low-key to 'ordinary' code reading and maintenance. - find a build time method to insert dwarf annotations automatically in the most common cases, for pop/push instructions that manipulate the stack pointer. This could be done for example via a preprocessing step that just looks for common patterns - plus special annotations for the few cases where we want to depart from the default. We have hundreds of CFI annotations, so automating most of that makes sense. - it should come with build tooling checks that ensure that CFI annotations are sensible. We've seen such efforts from the framepointer side, and there's no reason it couldn't be done on the dwarf side. Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Frédéric Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Jan Beulich <JBeulich@suse.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2015-05-28 12:21:47 +02:00
pushfq
pushq $__KERNEL_CS
pushq $repeat_nmi
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
/* Put stack back */
addq $(6*8), %rsp
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
nested_nmi_out:
popq %rdx
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
/* We are returning to kernel mode, so this cannot result in a fault. */
iretq
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
first_nmi:
/* Restore rdx. */
movq (%rsp), %rdx
/* Make room for "NMI executing". */
pushq $0
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
/* Leave room for the "iret" frame */
subq $(5*8), %rsp
/* Copy the "original" frame to the "outermost" frame */
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
.rept 5
pushq 11*8(%rsp)
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
.endr
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS
/* Everything up to here is safe from nested NMIs */
#ifdef CONFIG_DEBUG_ENTRY
/*
* For ease of testing, unmask NMIs right away. Disabled by
* default because IRET is very expensive.
*/
pushq $0 /* SS */
pushq %rsp /* RSP (minus 8 because of the previous push) */
addq $8, (%rsp) /* Fix up RSP */
pushfq /* RFLAGS */
pushq $__KERNEL_CS /* CS */
pushq $1f /* RIP */
iretq /* continues at repeat_nmi below */
UNWIND_HINT_IRET_REGS
1:
#endif
repeat_nmi:
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR // this code
/*
* If there was a nested NMI, the first NMI's iret will return
* here. But NMIs are still enabled and we can take another
* nested NMI. The nested NMI checks the interrupted RIP to see
* if it is between repeat_nmi and end_repeat_nmi, and if so
* it will just return, as we are about to repeat an NMI anyway.
* This makes it safe to copy to the stack frame that a nested
* NMI will update.
*
* RSP is pointing to "outermost RIP". gsbase is unknown, but, if
* we're repeating an NMI, gsbase has the same value that it had on
* the first iteration. paranoid_entry will load the kernel
* gsbase if needed before we call exc_nmi(). "NMI executing"
* is zero.
*/
movq $1, 10*8(%rsp) /* Set "NMI executing". */
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
/*
* Copy the "outermost" frame to the "iret" frame. NMIs that nest
* here must not modify the "iret" frame while we're writing to
* it or it will end up containing garbage.
*/
addq $(10*8), %rsp
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
.rept 5
pushq -6*8(%rsp)
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
.endr
subq $(5*8), %rsp
end_repeat_nmi:
ANNOTATE_NOENDBR // this code
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
/*
* Everything below this point can be preempted by a nested NMI.
* If this happens, then the inner NMI will change the "iret"
* frame to point back to repeat_nmi.
x86: Add workaround to NMI iret woes In x86, when an NMI goes off, the CPU goes into an NMI context that prevents other NMIs to trigger on that CPU. If an NMI is suppose to trigger, it has to wait till the previous NMI leaves NMI context. At that time, the next NMI can trigger (note, only one more NMI will trigger, as only one can be latched at a time). The way x86 gets out of NMI context is by calling iret. The problem with this is that this causes problems if the NMI handle either triggers an exception, or a breakpoint. Both the exception and the breakpoint handlers will finish with an iret. If this happens while in NMI context, the CPU will leave NMI context and a new NMI may come in. As NMI handlers are not made to be re-entrant, this can cause havoc with the system, not to mention, the nested NMI will write all over the previous NMI's stack. Linus Torvalds proposed the following workaround to this problem: https://lkml.org/lkml/2010/7/14/264 "In fact, I wonder if we couldn't just do a software NMI disable instead? Hav ea per-cpu variable (in the _core_ percpu areas that get allocated statically) that points to the NMI stack frame, and just make the NMI code itself do something like NMI entry: - load percpu NMI stack frame pointer - if non-zero we know we're nested, and should ignore this NMI: - we're returning to kernel mode, so return immediately by using "popf/ret", which also keeps NMI's disabled in the hardware until the "real" NMI iret happens. - before the popf/iret, use the NMI stack pointer to make the NMI return stack be invalid and cause a fault - set the NMI stack pointer to the current stack pointer NMI exit (not the above "immediate exit because we nested"): clear the percpu NMI stack pointer Just do the iret. Now, the thing is, now the "iret" is atomic. If we had a nested NMI, we'll take a fault, and that re-does our "delayed" NMI - and NMI's will stay masked. And if we didn't have a nested NMI, that iret will now unmask NMI's, and everything is happy." I first tried to follow this advice but as I started implementing this code, a few gotchas showed up. One, is accessing per-cpu variables in the NMI handler. The problem is that per-cpu variables use the %gs register to get the variable for the given CPU. But as the NMI may happen in userspace, we must first perform a SWAPGS to get to it. The NMI handler already does this later in the code, but its too late as we have saved off all the registers and we don't want to do that for a disabled NMI. Peter Zijlstra suggested to keep all variables on the stack. This simplifies things greatly and it has the added benefit of cache locality. Two, faulting on the iret. I really wanted to make this work, but it was becoming very hacky, and I never got it to be stable. The iret already had a fault handler for userspace faulting with bad segment registers, and getting NMI to trigger a fault and detect it was very tricky. But for strange reasons, the system would usually take a double fault and crash. I never figured out why and decided to go with a simple "jmp" approach. The new approach I took also simplified things. Finally, the last problem with Linus's approach was to have the nested NMI handler do a ret instead of an iret to give the first NMI NMI-context again. The problem is that ret is much more limited than an iret. I couldn't figure out how to get the stack back where it belonged. I could have copied the current stack, pushed the return onto it, but my fear here is that there may be some place that writes data below the stack pointer. I know that is not something code should depend on, but I don't want to chance it. I may add this feature later, but for now, an NMI handler that loses NMI context will not get it back. Here's what is done: When an NMI comes in, the HW pushes the interrupt stack frame onto the per cpu NMI stack that is selected by the IST. A special location on the NMI stack holds a variable that is set when the first NMI handler runs. If this variable is set then we know that this is a nested NMI and we process the nested NMI code. There is still a race when this variable is cleared and an NMI comes in just before the first NMI does the return. For this case, if the variable is cleared, we also check if the interrupted stack is the NMI stack. If it is, then we process the nested NMI code. Why the two tests and not just test the interrupted stack? If the first NMI hits a breakpoint and loses NMI context, and then it hits another breakpoint and while processing that breakpoint we get a nested NMI. When processing a breakpoint, the stack changes to the breakpoint stack. If another NMI comes in here we can't rely on the interrupted stack to be the NMI stack. If the variable is not set and the interrupted task's stack is not the NMI stack, then we know this is the first NMI and we can process things normally. But in order to do so, we need to do a few things first. 1) Set the stack variable that tells us that we are in an NMI handler 2) Make two copies of the interrupt stack frame. One copy is used to return on iret The other is used to restore the first one if we have a nested NMI. This is what the stack will look like: +-------------------------+ | original SS | | original Return RSP | | original RFLAGS | | original CS | | original RIP | +-------------------------+ | temp storage for rdx | +-------------------------+ | NMI executing variable | +-------------------------+ | Saved SS | | Saved Return RSP | | Saved RFLAGS | | Saved CS | | Saved RIP | +-------------------------+ | copied SS | | copied Return RSP | | copied RFLAGS | | copied CS | | copied RIP | +-------------------------+ | pt_regs | +-------------------------+ The original stack frame contains what the HW put in when we entered the NMI. We store %rdx as a temp variable to use. Both the original HW stack frame and this %rdx storage will be clobbered by nested NMIs so we can not rely on them later in the first NMI handler. The next item is the special stack variable that is set when we execute the rest of the NMI handler. Then we have two copies of the interrupt stack. The second copy is modified by any nested NMIs to let the first NMI know that we triggered a second NMI (latched) and that we should repeat the NMI handler. If the first NMI hits an exception or breakpoint that takes it out of NMI context, if a second NMI comes in before the first one finishes, it will update the copied interrupt stack to point to a fix up location to trigger another NMI. When the first NMI calls iret, it will instead jump to the fix up location. This fix up location will copy the saved interrupt stack back to the copy and execute the nmi handler again. Note, the nested NMI knows enough to check if it preempted a previous NMI handler while it is in the fixup location. If it has, it will not modify the copied interrupt stack and will just leave as if nothing happened. As the NMI handle is about to execute again, there's no reason to latch now. To test all this, I forced the NMI handler to call iret and take itself out of NMI context. I also added assemble code to write to the serial to make sure that it hits the nested path as well as the fix up path. Everything seems to be working fine. Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@linux.intel.com> Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Paul Turner <pjt@google.com> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <mathieu.desnoyers@efficios.com> Signed-off-by: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
2011-12-08 12:36:23 -05:00
*/
pushq $-1 /* ORIG_RAX: no syscall to restart */
x86/asm/entry/64: Always allocate a complete "struct pt_regs" on the kernel stack The 64-bit entry code was using six stack slots less by not saving/restoring registers which are callee-preserved according to the C ABI, and was not allocating space for them. Only when syscalls needed a complete "struct pt_regs" was the complete area allocated and filled in. As an additional twist, on interrupt entry a "slightly less truncated pt_regs" trick is used, to make nested interrupt stacks easier to unwind. This proved to be a source of significant obfuscation and subtle bugs. For example, 'stub_fork' had to pop the return address, extend the struct, save registers, and push return address back. Ugly. 'ia32_ptregs_common' pops return address and "returns" via jmp insn, throwing a wrench into CPU return stack cache. This patch changes the code to always allocate a complete "struct pt_regs" on the kernel stack. The saving of registers is still done lazily. "Partial pt_regs" trick on interrupt stack is retained. Macros which manipulate "struct pt_regs" on stack are reworked: - ALLOC_PT_GPREGS_ON_STACK allocates the structure. - SAVE_C_REGS saves to it those registers which are clobbered by C code. - SAVE_EXTRA_REGS saves to it all other registers. - Corresponding RESTORE_* and REMOVE_PT_GPREGS_FROM_STACK macros reverse it. 'ia32_ptregs_common', 'stub_fork' and friends lost their ugly dance with the return pointer. LOAD_ARGS32 in ia32entry.S now uses symbolic stack offsets instead of magic numbers. 'error_entry' and 'save_paranoid' now use SAVE_C_REGS + SAVE_EXTRA_REGS instead of having it open-coded yet again. Patch was run-tested: 64-bit executables, 32-bit executables, strace works. Timing tests did not show measurable difference in 32-bit and 64-bit syscalls. Signed-off-by: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Signed-off-by: Andy Lutomirski <luto@amacapital.net> Cc: Alexei Starovoitov <ast@plumgrid.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Kees Cook <keescook@chromium.org> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Oleg Nesterov <oleg@redhat.com> Cc: Will Drewry <wad@chromium.org> Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/1423778052-21038-2-git-send-email-dvlasenk@redhat.com Link: http://lkml.kernel.org/r/b89763d354aa23e670b9bdf3a40ae320320a7c2e.1424989793.git.luto@amacapital.net Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2015-02-26 14:40:27 -08:00
/*
* Use paranoid_entry to handle SWAPGS, but no need to use paranoid_exit
* as we should not be calling schedule in NMI context.
* Even with normal interrupts enabled. An NMI should not be
* setting NEED_RESCHED or anything that normal interrupts and
* exceptions might do.
*/
call paranoid_entry
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
movq %rsp, %rdi
call exc_nmi
/* Always restore stashed SPEC_CTRL value (see paranoid_entry) */
IBRS_EXIT save_reg=%r15
PARANOID_RESTORE_CR3 scratch_reg=%r15 save_reg=%r14
x86/mm/pti: Prepare the x86/entry assembly code for entry/exit CR3 switching PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION needs to switch to a different CR3 value when it enters the kernel and switch back when it exits. This essentially needs to be done before leaving assembly code. This is extra challenging because the switching context is tricky: the registers that can be clobbered can vary. It is also hard to store things on the stack because there is an established ABI (ptregs) or the stack is entirely unsafe to use. Establish a set of macros that allow changing to the user and kernel CR3 values. Interactions with SWAPGS: Previous versions of the PAGE_TABLE_ISOLATION code relied on having per-CPU scratch space to save/restore a register that can be used for the CR3 MOV. The %GS register is used to index into our per-CPU space, so SWAPGS *had* to be done before the CR3 switch. That scratch space is gone now, but the semantic that SWAPGS must be done before the CR3 MOV is retained. This is good to keep because it is not that hard to do and it allows to do things like add per-CPU debugging information. What this does in the NMI code is worth pointing out. NMIs can interrupt *any* context and they can also be nested with NMIs interrupting other NMIs. The comments below ".Lnmi_from_kernel" explain the format of the stack during this situation. Changing the format of this stack is hard. Instead of storing the old CR3 value on the stack, this depends on the *regular* register save/restore mechanism and then uses %r14 to keep CR3 during the NMI. It is callee-saved and will not be clobbered by the C NMI handlers that get called. [ PeterZ: ESPFIX optimization ] Based-on-code-from: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Borislav Petkov <bp@suse.de> Reviewed-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Cc: Andy Lutomirski <luto@kernel.org> Cc: Boris Ostrovsky <boris.ostrovsky@oracle.com> Cc: Borislav Petkov <bp@alien8.de> Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com> Cc: David Laight <David.Laight@aculab.com> Cc: Denys Vlasenko <dvlasenk@redhat.com> Cc: Eduardo Valentin <eduval@amazon.com> Cc: Greg KH <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org> Cc: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com> Cc: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> Cc: Juergen Gross <jgross@suse.com> Cc: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org> Cc: Peter Zijlstra <peterz@infradead.org> Cc: Will Deacon <will.deacon@arm.com> Cc: aliguori@amazon.com Cc: daniel.gruss@iaik.tugraz.at Cc: hughd@google.com Cc: keescook@google.com Cc: linux-mm@kvack.org Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
2017-12-04 15:07:35 +01:00
/*
* The above invocation of paranoid_entry stored the GSBASE
* related information in R/EBX depending on the availability
* of FSGSBASE.
*
* If FSGSBASE is enabled, restore the saved GSBASE value
* unconditionally, otherwise take the conditional SWAPGS path.
*/
ALTERNATIVE "jmp nmi_no_fsgsbase", "", X86_FEATURE_FSGSBASE
wrgsbase %rbx
jmp nmi_restore
nmi_no_fsgsbase:
/* EBX == 0 -> invoke SWAPGS */
testl %ebx, %ebx
jnz nmi_restore
nmi_swapgs:
swapgs
nmi_restore:
POP_REGS
/*
* Skip orig_ax and the "outermost" frame to point RSP at the "iret"
* at the "iret" frame.
*/
addq $6*8, %rsp
/*
* Clear "NMI executing". Set DF first so that we can easily
* distinguish the remaining code between here and IRET from
* the SYSCALL entry and exit paths.
*
* We arguably should just inspect RIP instead, but I (Andy) wrote
* this code when I had the misapprehension that Xen PV supported
* NMIs, and Xen PV would break that approach.
*/
std
movq $0, 5*8(%rsp) /* clear "NMI executing" */
x86/entry_64: Add VERW just before userspace transition Mitigation for MDS is to use VERW instruction to clear any secrets in CPU Buffers. Any memory accesses after VERW execution can still remain in CPU buffers. It is safer to execute VERW late in return to user path to minimize the window in which kernel data can end up in CPU buffers. There are not many kernel secrets to be had after SWITCH_TO_USER_CR3. Add support for deploying VERW mitigation after user register state is restored. This helps minimize the chances of kernel data ending up into CPU buffers after executing VERW. Note that the mitigation at the new location is not yet enabled. Corner case not handled ======================= Interrupts returning to kernel don't clear CPUs buffers since the exit-to-user path is expected to do that anyways. But, there could be a case when an NMI is generated in kernel after the exit-to-user path has cleared the buffers. This case is not handled and NMI returning to kernel don't clear CPU buffers because: 1. It is rare to get an NMI after VERW, but before returning to userspace. 2. For an unprivileged user, there is no known way to make that NMI less rare or target it. 3. It would take a large number of these precisely-timed NMIs to mount an actual attack. There's presumably not enough bandwidth. 4. The NMI in question occurs after a VERW, i.e. when user state is restored and most interesting data is already scrubbed. Whats left is only the data that NMI touches, and that may or may not be of any interest. Suggested-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Pawan Gupta <pawan.kumar.gupta@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/all/20240213-delay-verw-v8-2-a6216d83edb7%40linux.intel.com
2024-02-13 18:21:52 -08:00
/*
* Skip CLEAR_CPU_BUFFERS here, since it only helps in rare cases like
* NMI in kernel after user state is restored. For an unprivileged user
* these conditions are hard to meet.
*/
/*
* iretq reads the "iret" frame and exits the NMI stack in a
* single instruction. We are returning to kernel mode, so this
* cannot result in a fault. Similarly, we don't need to worry
* about espfix64 on the way back to kernel mode.
*/
iretq
SYM_CODE_END(asm_exc_nmi)
/*
* This handles SYSCALL from 32-bit code. There is no way to program
* MSRs to fully disable 32-bit SYSCALL.
*/
SYM_CODE_START(entry_SYSCALL32_ignore)
UNWIND_HINT_END_OF_STACK
ENDBR
mov $-ENOSYS, %eax
x86/entry_64: Add VERW just before userspace transition Mitigation for MDS is to use VERW instruction to clear any secrets in CPU Buffers. Any memory accesses after VERW execution can still remain in CPU buffers. It is safer to execute VERW late in return to user path to minimize the window in which kernel data can end up in CPU buffers. There are not many kernel secrets to be had after SWITCH_TO_USER_CR3. Add support for deploying VERW mitigation after user register state is restored. This helps minimize the chances of kernel data ending up into CPU buffers after executing VERW. Note that the mitigation at the new location is not yet enabled. Corner case not handled ======================= Interrupts returning to kernel don't clear CPUs buffers since the exit-to-user path is expected to do that anyways. But, there could be a case when an NMI is generated in kernel after the exit-to-user path has cleared the buffers. This case is not handled and NMI returning to kernel don't clear CPU buffers because: 1. It is rare to get an NMI after VERW, but before returning to userspace. 2. For an unprivileged user, there is no known way to make that NMI less rare or target it. 3. It would take a large number of these precisely-timed NMIs to mount an actual attack. There's presumably not enough bandwidth. 4. The NMI in question occurs after a VERW, i.e. when user state is restored and most interesting data is already scrubbed. Whats left is only the data that NMI touches, and that may or may not be of any interest. Suggested-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@intel.com> Signed-off-by: Pawan Gupta <pawan.kumar.gupta@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Dave Hansen <dave.hansen@linux.intel.com> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/all/20240213-delay-verw-v8-2-a6216d83edb7%40linux.intel.com
2024-02-13 18:21:52 -08:00
CLEAR_CPU_BUFFERS
sysretl
SYM_CODE_END(entry_SYSCALL32_ignore)
.pushsection .text, "ax"
__FUNC_ALIGN
SYM_CODE_START_NOALIGN(rewind_stack_and_make_dead)
UNWIND_HINT_FUNC
/* Prevent any naive code from trying to unwind to our caller. */
xorl %ebp, %ebp
movq PER_CPU_VAR(pcpu_hot + X86_top_of_stack), %rax
leaq -PTREGS_SIZE(%rax), %rsp
UNWIND_HINT_REGS
call make_task_dead
SYM_CODE_END(rewind_stack_and_make_dead)
.popsection
x86/bhi: Add support for clearing branch history at syscall entry Branch History Injection (BHI) attacks may allow a malicious application to influence indirect branch prediction in kernel by poisoning the branch history. eIBRS isolates indirect branch targets in ring0. The BHB can still influence the choice of indirect branch predictor entry, and although branch predictor entries are isolated between modes when eIBRS is enabled, the BHB itself is not isolated between modes. Alder Lake and new processors supports a hardware control BHI_DIS_S to mitigate BHI. For older processors Intel has released a software sequence to clear the branch history on parts that don't support BHI_DIS_S. Add support to execute the software sequence at syscall entry and VMexit to overwrite the branch history. For now, branch history is not cleared at interrupt entry, as malicious applications are not believed to have sufficient control over the registers, since previous register state is cleared at interrupt entry. Researchers continue to poke at this area and it may become necessary to clear at interrupt entry as well in the future. This mitigation is only defined here. It is enabled later. Signed-off-by: Pawan Gupta <pawan.kumar.gupta@linux.intel.com> Co-developed-by: Daniel Sneddon <daniel.sneddon@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Daniel Sneddon <daniel.sneddon@linux.intel.com> Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Alexandre Chartre <alexandre.chartre@oracle.com> Reviewed-by: Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@kernel.org>
2024-03-11 08:56:58 -07:00
/*
* This sequence executes branches in order to remove user branch information
* from the branch history tracker in the Branch Predictor, therefore removing
* user influence on subsequent BTB lookups.
*
* It should be used on parts prior to Alder Lake. Newer parts should use the
* BHI_DIS_S hardware control instead. If a pre-Alder Lake part is being
* virtualized on newer hardware the VMM should protect against BHI attacks by
* setting BHI_DIS_S for the guests.
*
* CALLs/RETs are necessary to prevent Loop Stream Detector(LSD) from engaging
* and not clearing the branch history. The call tree looks like:
*
* call 1
* call 2
* call 2
* call 2
* call 2
* call 2
* ret
* ret
* ret
* ret
* ret
* ret
*
* This means that the stack is non-constant and ORC can't unwind it with %rsp
* alone. Therefore we unconditionally set up the frame pointer, which allows
* ORC to unwind properly.
*
* The alignment is for performance and not for safety, and may be safely
* refactored in the future if needed.
*/
SYM_FUNC_START(clear_bhb_loop)
push %rbp
mov %rsp, %rbp
movl $5, %ecx
ANNOTATE_INTRA_FUNCTION_CALL
call 1f
jmp 5f
.align 64, 0xcc
ANNOTATE_INTRA_FUNCTION_CALL
1: call 2f
RET
.align 64, 0xcc
2: movl $5, %eax
3: jmp 4f
nop
4: sub $1, %eax
jnz 3b
sub $1, %ecx
jnz 1b
RET
5: lfence
pop %rbp
RET
SYM_FUNC_END(clear_bhb_loop)
EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL(clear_bhb_loop)
STACK_FRAME_NON_STANDARD(clear_bhb_loop)